JP7221513B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

In conventional game machines, there is a game machine that can control a plurality of LEDs by providing a conversion device that converts a control signal for controlling LEDs from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP 2017-143854 A

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 uses a parallel signal system, the number of wires is increased, and disconnection of the wires is likely to occur. There is a problem that if a disconnection occurs during the operation of the game machine, the light of the LED cannot be adjusted and the interest in the game is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and its object is to provide a gaming machine in which disconnection of wiring is less likely to occur and interest during operation is less likely to decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
In the gaming machine (100) of Application Example 1 of the present invention, a first control board (control board 501) on which a plurality of electronic components (electronic components 595) for controlling a game are mounted, and the first control board A first control means (main control board 300) having a first housing portion (case portion 1803) that is housed and has optical transparency; and a material that is attached to the first housing portion and has first optical transparency. a first sealing portion (sealing portion 1560) formed by; a second sealing portion (sealing portion 1561) adhered to the first storage portion and formed of a material having a second light transmittance ; an information display portion (identification display 523) for displaying information about the first control means, which is displayed at a position different from the first seal portion and the second seal portion in one storage portion; A second control board (prize ball board 1811) capable of communicating with the board and having a plurality of electronic components mounted thereon, and a second storage section (case section 1813) that houses the second control board and has optical transparency. and a third seal portion (seal portion 1816) attached to the second storage portion and formed of a material having light transmittance different from the first light transmittance, The first seal portion has a first area (first area 1814) in which unique information is formed by a pattern, and a second area in which unique information (unique information 1804) is formed in a manner different from that of the first area. (Second region 1815) is formed by the first light-transmitting property different from the second light-transmitting property by having the Between a plurality of colored regions (colored regions 1575) that are regions with reduced transparency, a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, and a second colored region different from the first colored region In the first region without the letters of , a first visible region (peeping 1574), and the information display unit is composed of a first display (characters 1371) and a second display (characters 1372), and the first display and the second display are the same as the first display. A plurality of colored regions ( Among the colored regions 1817), between the third colored region and the fourth colored region different from the third colored region, the The gist is to have a second visible area (peek portion 1819) in which the electronic components of the second control board can be visually recognized .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which interest during operation is less likely to decline.

1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160; 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of a main control board 300; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of a main control board 300; FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables and the like; It is explanatory drawing which shows big-hit design determination table T2 and the distribution ratio of the kind of big-hit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first special first normal fluctuation pattern table T4A; 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by a main control board 300; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a preliminary determination process executed by a main CPU 301a of a main control board 300; It is a block diagram which shows the detail of the production|presentation control board 320. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in a sub-RAM 320c; It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of the process performed by the production|presentation control board 320. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of prefetch processing; 9 is a flowchart of effect pattern determination processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 1500 for controlling the drive of a character of the gaming machine 100 and dimming the LED of the character. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the logic part 1530 provided in the production|presentation control board 320. FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a timing chart of each signal in the logic section 1530; 15A and 15B are diagrams showing an external view and terminal arrangement as viewed from above when the one-wire driver 1520 is implemented as an integrated circuit; FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the function of each terminal in the one-wire driver 1520 in association with the symbol of each terminal; 3 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram for comparing the data signals of a conventional two-wire driver 1510 and a one-wire driver 1520 that synchronize and use two-wire data signals of a clock signal and a data signal; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a data setting format of each command input to the one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing data contents set in each input mode of the one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining setting of a slave of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. FIG. 24B is a diagram (a continuation of FIG. 24-1) for explaining slave settings of the one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining subaddress setting of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining setting of data bytes of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining precautions for data setting of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of signal changes when control data is input to a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of signal changes when control data is input to a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of signal changes when control data is input to a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of signal changes when control data is input to a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining power supply settings of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration in which one-wire drivers 1520 are cascaded; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a Vcc waveform at power-on reset of the one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing changes in Vcc during an ID setting operation of the one-wire driver 1520; 10 is a flow chart showing state transition when using the VL terminal during operation of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing state transition when the 1-wire driver 1520 is in operation and the VL terminal is not used. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the absolute maximum ratings of the one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing package power dissipation characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520; 4 is a table for explaining operating conditions of a one-wire driver 1520; 4 is a table for explaining electrical characteristics of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing electrical characteristics of a one-wire driver 1520; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4300 in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4400 in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the flow of exclusive OR calculation processing executed by a lamp CPU 4450 in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4600 in which a plurality of 1-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of 2-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection) according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an external view showing a schematic arrangement of decoration units around a game area in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a simplified logic circuit 4630, which is another embodiment; 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the outer frame 10, the game board unit 12, and the inner frame 14 opened. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the game board unit 12. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12. FIG. They are (a) a perspective view, (b) a rear view, and (c) a right side view of the assembly 2. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2; FIG. 3 is a left side view showing how the board case 3 is assembled to the base 20. FIG. It is the (a) perspective view of the board|substrate case 3, (b) rear view, (c) right side view. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a substrate case 3; FIG. 3A and 3B are a rear view and a front view of a sealing body 4 in which an outer case 45 and an inner case 40 are combined; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the circuit board case 1003 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the circuit board case 1103 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the circuit board case 1203 according to the modification, taken along line AA in FIG. 55. FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of a substrate case 1303 according to a modified example; FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1303 taken along line BB in FIG. 61; FIG. 15 is a rear view of a board case 1551 according to a modified example; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 as seen from an angle where the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502; FIG. 20 is a rear view of a board case 1700 in which a control board 1705 according to the eighth embodiment is housed; (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a date mark portion 1720. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display configuration of an information display device 1750. FIG. 17 is a table for explaining the contents displayed on the information display device 1750 and the display form regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1; 4 is a table for explaining the contents displayed on an information display device 1750 and the display form regarding the setting display of the game machine 1. FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1791 of a substrate case 1790 according to a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a substrate case 1795 according to a modification. FIG. 22 is a rear view of a board case 1803 in which a control board 501 according to the ninth embodiment is housed; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a state in which an electronic component 595 is viewed obliquely from above through a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561; It is the (a) top view of the transparent socket 1801, (b) a side view. 66-1 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of substrate cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. 66-1 are sectional views (a) and (b) of substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display section 541; FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560; It is a typical rear view of the case part 1813 which accommodated the prize ball board|substrate 1811. FIG. It is a typical rear view of the case part 1823 which accommodated the production|presentation board|substrate 1821. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of assembly 2, in which control board 501 is provided with first region 1900a and second region 1900b.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100, which is a first embodiment as one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. It should be noted that the embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements described in the embodiments and combinations thereof are essential to the solution of the present invention. do not have.

(First embodiment)
[Configuration of Gaming Machine 100]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. FIG. The game machine 100 shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when the game balls win a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. machine.

In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "X direction" as necessary, the rightward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "+X direction", and the leftward direction of the gaming machine 100 is referred to as the "-X direction." Also called direction. The vertical direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “Y direction”, and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “+Y direction”, and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “−Y direction”. Furthermore, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Z direction", and in particular, the direction toward the back side of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction", and the direction toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is called the "Z direction". -Z direction”.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 attached to the island facility of the game arcade, and an inner frame 170 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 160. , and a glass frame 150 rotatably supported with the inner frame 170 on the front side of the inner frame 170 . A glass member 151 is detachably provided on the back side of the glass frame 150 . Further, at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 160, and a lock unit 190 for attaching and detaching the upper unit 180 described later is provided. . Furthermore, a glass frame open switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened. An inner frame opening switch (not shown) is provided for detecting that it has been opened.

The inner frame 170 is provided with main mechanisms, various parts, substrates, and the like that constitute the game machine 100, and the game board unit 102 is detachably provided thereon. A game area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the game board unit 102 . The game area 106 includes a game ball flow-down area (not shown) in which game balls flow down, and a display screen area of the main display device 131 .

The game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A made of a transparent acrylic member. A plurality of nails (not shown) and pinwheels (not shown) are arranged on the game board 102A. These nails and pinwheels have the function of changing the motion of the game ball and guiding it to a predetermined winning hole. In the game board 102A, the player-side surface is also called the front side, and the back side (opposite side to the front side) is also called the back side.

The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is placed in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131 .

Although the game board 102A is transparent in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game board 102A may be formed to be translucent, and may be translucent. Also, the game board 102A may be formed of a member other than an acrylic member, such as a transparent plastic member.

A production operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150 . The effect operation unit BSU is composed of a sword handle unit 135 and effect operation sticks 136 . A top plate 128 is provided on the back side of the performance operation unit BSU. A lower plate 129 is provided at the lower left of the effect operation unit BSU. Furthermore, a firing handle device 103 is provided on the lower right side of the effect operation unit BSU.

In addition, an upper unit 180 is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150, and when a predetermined game state is reached, the upper unit 180 executes a predetermined related operation (the upper unit 180 is provided with an outer frame in addition to the glass frame 150). 160). Furthermore, on both left and right sides of the glass frame 150, a first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided for effecting display during games and non-games.

The upper plate 128 is a plate for storing game balls to be shot to the game area 106 . The lower plate 129 is a plate for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 128 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are guided to a launch rail (not shown), and guided to a guide rail (not shown) via the launch rail at a predetermined launch strength by the launch handle device 103, and are played. It is launched to the area 106 (game ball flow-down area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the shooting handle device 103, the game ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 passes through the left route 4706a or the right route 4706b of the game ball flow-down area included in the game area 106. do. Specifically, when the player rotates the shooting handle device 103 relatively weakly, the gaming ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 can pass through the left route 4706a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the shooting handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 can pass through the right route 4706b.

A sword handle unit 135 is arranged in the central part of the effect operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 can change the effect mode by pressing. Also, an effect operation stick 136 is provided on the left side of the effect operation unit BSU.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 106 has a sword unit 154 on the back side of the upper part, and a first character unit 155a on the front side (front side) of the sword unit 154 on the left side of the upper part of the game ball flowing down area. A second character unit 155b is placed on the right side of the lower part of the ball flow area, a first moonlight unit 156 is placed on the left side of the game ball flow area, a second moonlight unit 157 is placed on the right side of the game ball flow area, and a front side of the game area 106 ( The first light guide panel 181a that covers the game area 106 on the front side), and the second light guide panel 181b that covers the front side (front side) of each unit 154, 155a, 155b, 156, 157 on the back side of the game area 106. , respectively.

Each unit 154, 155a, 155b, 156, 157 provided in the game area 106 is a movable accessory (so-called gimmick), and these units 154, 155a, 155b, 156, 157 are used by the player to progress the game. Various effects are performed by moving the robot in a predetermined motion depending on the state. Further, the first light guide panel 181a and the second light guide panel 181b are panels made of resin such as transparent acrylic, and allow the performance display displayed on the main display device 131 to pass through and be visible. A pattern or the like can be displayed by causing a portion of the panel to emit light with light incident from a portion (not shown).

In the present application, "movable accessory" is interpreted to mean a moving accessory. Also, "character" is interpreted broadly to include both movable and immovable characters.

A first starting device 112 having a starting area in which a game ball can enter is provided in a substantially central lower area of the game area 106 . This first starting device 112 is a winning device of a general winning device type, and when a game ball wins, a jackpot random number is acquired, a jackpot determination is made, and predetermined prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. . In addition, above the first starting device 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails, mainly in the middle of the left route 4706a of the game ball flowing-down area, so-called warping, and enters the first starting device 112. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate.

A second starting device 115 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided in the lower right area of the game area 106 . The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and is provided with a starting port at its lower portion, and has a movable piece 115b above the starting port. It is movably controlled between a protruding state protruding from 102A and a retracting state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is retracted, the game ball is led into the second starting device 115 from the starting port, and the game ball easily enters the second starting device 115.例文帳に追加Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in a projecting state, the game ball does not enter the starting hole, and the game ball cannot win the second starting device 115.例文帳に追加That is, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the second starting device 115 has no chance of winning the game ball, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the chance of winning the game ball increases.

When a game ball wins, the second starting device 115 acquires a jackpot random number and performs a jackpot determination in the same manner as the first starting device 112, and for example, the same prize balls as the first starting device 112 (three pieces). is paid out.

In addition, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, there are a normal symbol operation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first big winning device 117 in which game balls can enter, and a game ball which can enter. A second big winning device 127 is provided. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, a random number is acquired and a determination is made. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the prize ball based on the passage is not paid out.

The first big prize winning device 117 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and has an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 117b above the opening. It is movably controlled between a projecting state in which it projects from the board 102A and a retracted state in which it retracts into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the opening into the first big winning device 117, and the game ball can win the first big winning device 117 (this state is called "open" or "open"). (also called state). Also, when a game ball wins in the first big prize winning device 117, predetermined prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in a projecting state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win the first prize winning device 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state"). ).

The second big winning device 127 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and has an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 127b on the upper side of the opening. It is movably controlled between a projecting state in which it projects from the board 102A and a retracted state in which it retracts into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 127b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the opening into the second big winning device 127, and the game ball can win the second big winning device 127 (this state is "open" or "open"). (also called state). Also, when a game ball wins the second prize winning device 127, predetermined prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 127b is in a projecting state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win the second prize winning device 127 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state"). ).

Also, above the second big prize winning device 127, a prize winning auxiliary device 200 is provided. This winning auxiliary device 200 is designed to stay on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time when a plurality of game balls passing through the right route 4706b of the game area 106 pass through the closed movable piece 127b. , the movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of staying game balls are made to enter the second big winning device 127 at once, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. .

At the bottom of the game area 106, game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 are discharged. An out port 111 is provided for this purpose. A cover 116 that covers the gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 from the front side is provided in the area on the right side of the game area . The cover 116 is formed with a guiding portion protruding toward the game board 102A in order to guide the game ball to the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127. As shown in FIG.

A main display device 131 made up of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 106, and the main display device 131 displays an image during standby when no game is played. , to display an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, based on the winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, a plurality of decorative symbols for informing the determination result of the big hit are variably displayed, and a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, 777, etc.) is stopped and a fixed stop display is displayed, a big win is reported as a big win determination result.

That is, when the game ball wins in the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, the decorative symbols change the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122, which will be described later. It is variably displayed according to the display, and is stop-displayed according to the stop-display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined variation time. That is, the timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols by the main display device 131 and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 are synchronized. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative patterns, various images, characters, etc. are displayed in a performance, or by displaying a read-ahead performance of the reserved display related to the special symbols, etc., a jackpot may be won. It is also designed to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, in this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used, or a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, or the like may be used. A display device may be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display 125 is provided below the left side of the game area 106 . The display device 125 includes a normal symbol display device 118, a first special symbol display device 120, a second special symbol display device 122, a normal symbol reservation display device 119, a first special symbol reservation display device 123, and a second It has a special symbol reservation display 124 . Details of the display 125 will be described later.

The main display device 131 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 102, and variably displays three decorative symbols to display various effects. The effect displayed on the main display device 131 is executed based on the effect pattern described later. Below, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 are also simply referred to as "display effects". In this embodiment, the decorative patterns include numbers 1 to 9 and special patterns.

In the display effects on the main display device 131, when a winner is won in the jackpot determination, which will be described later, that is, in the case of a jackpot, three decorative patterns are finally stopped and displayed, and a jackpot pattern arrangement (for example, " 7, 7, 7”, etc.) are displayed. In addition, in the display effect, if you lose in the big hit determination described later, that is, if you lose, finally, the three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and a losing pattern array (for example, "2, 5 , 1”) is displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the result of the big hit determination.

When the player performs so-called "left-handed hitting" in which the shooting handle device 103 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 106 . On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed shot" in which the shooting handle device 103 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 106 . Therefore, when making the ball enter the gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big prize winning device 117 or the second big prize winning device 127, it is necessary to hit to the right.

The first starter 112 is a normally open starter. On the other hand, the second starting device 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the result of determination on the condition that the game ball enters the gate 113b. In this case, a state is created in which the game ball can easily enter. When the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, a jackpot pattern random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and the following four determinations are made. can be performed.
(1) Determination of whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot determination).
(2) Determination of a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) for notifying the result of a big hit determination on the display 125 (hereinafter also referred to as a big hit symbol determination).
(3) Big Win Judgment In this pattern judging, in the case of a big win, a pattern representing the type of the big win (hereinafter also referred to as a big win pattern) is judged.
(4) Determination of whether or not reach is performed in the display effect on the main display device 131 (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination). Also called variation pattern judgment).

Here, the "jackpot game" is a special game in which the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 is opened. In addition, "ready-to-win" means that two of the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the main display device 131 are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative symbols are the three decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol array. It refers to the case where two of the above are formed. For example, in the main display device 131, out of the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed, two of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative symbols are in the same state. In this case, the decorative symbols forming two of the three decorative patterns forming the jackpot pattern array are also called ready-to-win patterns.

In the following description, the above four determinations that are executed on the condition that the game ball that has passed through the first starting device 112 wins a prize are also called "first special symbol determination", and the game ball to the second starting device 115 The above-mentioned four determinations executed on the condition of winning a prize are also called "second special symbol determination", and these determinations are also collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, a normal symbol random number is obtained, and a determination as to whether or not the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 is to be opened is executed. Below, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 113b is also called "normal symbol determination". In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning in normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is released, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 .

The movable piece 117b of the first big winning device 117 is opened according to the result of the jackpot symbol determination. The first big winning device 117 is normally closed by this movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big win determination is a big win, a big win game in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first big winning device 117 is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

[Explanation of display 125]
The display device 125 shown in FIG. 1 mainly displays information about jackpot symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display device 120, a second special symbol display device 122, a first special symbol reservation display device 123, and a second special symbol display device 123. It has a 2 special symbol reservation display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol reservation display 119.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 120 variably displays the special symbol and then stops displaying, and determines the jackpot symbol determination in the first special symbol determination by the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. Notify the results. On the first special symbol display 120, as the judgment result of the judgment of the big winning pattern, a big winning pattern indicating a big winning or a losing pattern showing that the result of the first special design judgment is a losing is displayed. be.

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 122 variably displays the special symbol and then stops displaying, and determines the jackpot symbol determination in the second special symbol determination by the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. Notify the results. On the second special symbol display 122, as the determination result of the big winning symbol determination, a big winning symbol indicating a big winning or a losing symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a losing is displayed. .

By the way, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball newly wins the first starting device 112, such as during the variable display of the special symbols related to the special symbol determination or during the jackpot game, the first game ball is triggered by this winning. 1 Special symbol determination and variable display of symbols are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspension function of suspending the first special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of suspension information. The first special symbol reservation display 123 displays the number of pieces of reservation information for the first special symbol determination thus stored.

Similarly, the gaming machine 100, when a game ball newly wins the second starting device 115, such as during the variable display of the special symbols related to the special symbol determination or during the jackpot game, the second special symbol triggered by this winning. It is configured so that the judgment and the variable display of the symbols are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspension function of suspending the second special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of suspension information. The second special symbol reservation display 124 displays the number of pieces of reservation information for the second special symbol determination thus stored.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 118 variably displays the normal symbol and then stops displaying, and notifies the result of the normal symbol determination by the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. By the way, even if the game ball passes through the gate 113b during the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 118, the normal symbol determination and the variable display of the normal symbols related to the normal symbol determination are not immediately executed. . Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspending function of suspending the normal symbol determination and storing the information of the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol determination as the suspending information. The normal design reservation display 119 displays the number of reservation information for normal design determination stored in this way.

The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-handed lamp lights up during a jackpot game state described later and a time-saving game state described later, and recommends the player to hit right (details will be described later). A round lamp consists of one or more lamps. The round lamp shifts from the off state to the on state at the time of the big win. The round lamp indicates the number of round games according to the jackpot type at the time of jackpot by lighting. For example, when there are two round lamps, lighting of one round lamp suggests that the round game will be executed four times (that is, a 4R jackpot), and the other round lamp is lit. lights up, suggesting that the round game will be played 16 times (that is, suggesting a 16R jackpot).

[Internal Configuration of Gaming Machine 100]
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300 , a payout control board 310 , an effect control board 320 , an image control board 330 , a lamp control board 340 , a launch control board 350 and a power supply board 360 .

The main control board 300 controls basic operations of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 has a one-chip microcomputer 301 . The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also has an input port and an output port for main control (both not shown).

The main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 for detecting that a game ball has entered the gate 113b, and a first starter detection switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starter 112. 304, a second starting device detection switch 305 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting device 115, and a first winning device detection switch 306a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first big winning device 117. , a second winning device detection switch 306b for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning device 127, and a payout control board 310 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the main control output port includes a starting device opening/closing solenoid 307 for opening and closing the movable piece 115b, a first big prize winning device opening/closing solenoid 308 for opening and closing the movable piece 117b for opening and closing the first big prize winning device 117, a second Second big winning device opening/closing solenoid 370 for operating movable piece 127b for opening/closing big winning device 127; Symbol reservation indicators 119, 123, 124 for displaying the number of information and the number of reservation information for normal symbol determination, a game information output terminal board 309 for outputting an external information signal, a payout control board 310, and an effect control board 320 It is connected. Various signals are output from this output port for main control.

Note that the game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 309 is wire-connected to the main control board 300, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting with a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads the program stored in the main ROM 301b based on the input signal from each detection switch and the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device. Alternatively, a command is sent to another board according to the result of arithmetic processing.

FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. FIG. 4-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. As shown in FIG. In particular, FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining information stored in the main ROM 301b, and FIG. 4-2 is a diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c.

The main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games. For example, as shown in FIG. 4-1, the main ROM 301b contains a jackpot determination table T1, a jackpot symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5. , a normal symbol determination table T6 is stored.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table for judging a jackpot based on a jackpot random number. The jackpot determination table T1 includes two jackpot determination tables, that is, a non-variable probability jackpot determination table T1A and a variable probability jackpot determination table T1B.

The big-hit symbol determination table T2 is a table for performing big-hit symbol determination based on the big-hit symbol random number. The jackpot symbol determination table T2 includes two jackpot symbol determination tables, namely, a special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A and a jackpot 2 symbol determination table T2B.

The reach determination table T3 is a table for performing reach determination based on reach determination random numbers. The reach determination table T3 includes four reach determination tables (not shown), namely, a special 1 normal reach determination table, a special 1 probability variable reach determination table, a special 2 normal reach determination table, and a special 2 probability variable Includes a reach determination table. These four ready-to-win determination tables are selected according to the game state and the type of special symbols. Specifically, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The special 1 variable probability reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the variable probability gaming state. Special 2 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The special 2 variable probability reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach using decorative symbols in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the variable probability gaming state. In addition, details of various game states such as non-probability variation gaming state and probability variation gaming state will be described later.

The first variation pattern table T4 is a table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern random numbers. The first variation pattern table T4 includes four variation pattern tables, that is, the first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special 1 probability fluctuation fluctuation pattern table T4B, and the first special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T4C. and a first special second probability variation time fluctuation pattern table T4D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the 1st special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol based on the entry ball to the 1st starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The 1st special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The 1st special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol based on the entry ball to the 2nd starting device 115 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The 1st special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

The second variation pattern table T5 is a table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern random numbers. The second variation pattern table T5 includes four variation pattern tables, that is, the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 probability fluctuation fluctuation pattern table T5B, and the second special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T5C. and a second special second probability variation time fluctuation pattern table T5D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The second special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The 2nd special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol based on the entry ball to the 2nd starting device 115 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The 2nd special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

Any one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of variation pattern determination, and is never selected at the same time. The first variation pattern table T4 is a table in which the average number of seconds of variation (average performance time) is shorter than the second variation pattern table T5. selected for The second variation pattern table T5 is a table in which the average number of seconds of variation is longer than the first variation pattern table T4, and is selected when the acquisition pending order information (to be described later) is "1" or "2". Details of these will be described later.

The normal symbol determination table T6 is a table for normal symbol determination based on the normal symbol random numbers. The details of the above-mentioned jackpot determination table T1, jackpot symbol determination table T2, first variation pattern table T4, second variation pattern table T5, and normal symbol determination table T6 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the main RAM 301c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 301a and has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 301c has a pending information storage area 301cx, a pending information determination area 301cy, and a winning ball equivalent information storage area 301cz. In addition, the main RAM 301c is a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (probability variable game flag, time saving game flag, jackpot game flag, etc., which will be described later) and various recorded values (variable K and constant Km, which will be described later) are stored. ).

As shown in FIG. 4-2(B), the pending information storage area 301cx has four pending information areas (first 1 reserved information area, 2nd reserved information area, 3rd reserved information area, 4th reserved information area) and 4 reserved information areas (first reserved information area, A second reserved information area, a third reserved information area, a fourth reserved information area) are provided.

In the pending information area corresponding to the first special symbol of the pending information storage area 301cx, the priority order of storing the pending information is the first pending information area is stored with the highest priority, and the pending information is stored in the first pending information area. If it is stored, then the second reserved information area is preferentially stored, then the third reserved information area is preferentially stored, and finally the fourth reserved information area is stored. selected. The same applies to the reserved information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In addition, in FIG. 4-2(B), the pending information area in which the pending information is stored is indicated by "○", and the pending information area in which the pending information is not stored is indicated by "-". It is shown.

Acquisition pending order information stored in the pending information area of the pending information storage area 301cx is information representing the pending order when the pending information is acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area stored when the hold information is acquired. For example, when pending information is acquired, if the pending information is stored only in the first pending information area, the pending information will be stored in the second pending information area. The information becomes "2". When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area Since it will be stored, the hold order information at the time of acquisition becomes "4". The reservation information determination area 301cy is a determination area in which special symbol determination is performed based on the reservation information.

The acquired ball-equivalent information storage area 301cz is information for storing the acquired ball-equivalent equivalent information. The obtained ball-equivalent information indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player based on the winning to the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 in the jackpot game state. The number represented by the acquired ball-equivalent information stored in the acquired ball-equivalent information storage area 301cz (also referred to as the acquired ball-equivalent number) is determined by the number of game balls in the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127. When entered, the number of winning balls (eg, 15 for the first big winning device 117 and 10 for the second big winning device 127) is added. In other words, the number represented by the winning ball equivalent information is a value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls entering the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 by the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that the acquired/dealed ball equivalent information stored in the acquired/dealed ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is reset (erased) by the main CPU 301a when the time-saving gaming state is terminated. Therefore, the number represented by the obtained ball-equivalent information is the number of game balls put out in the jackpot game state at the time of the first jackpot, and the number of game balls put out to the jackpot game state again before the time-saving game state after the first jackpot ends. It is the sum of the number of game balls paid out to . That is, the number of obtained balls equivalent to the number of balls paid out while the time-saving gaming state continues is added by the number of game balls paid out in the big winning gaming state each time the game shifts to the big winning gaming state.

The main RAM 301c is provided with a backup area 301cp in addition to a memory for temporarily storing various data. The backup area 301cp stores the value of the stack pointer and various data at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown due to operation of the power switch 122; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure is cleared (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 122; the same shall apply hereinafter), the state of the gaming machine 100 can be restored to the state before the power interruption based on the information in the backup area 301cp. It's like Writing to the backup area 301cp is executed by power recovery processing when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 301cp is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

The payout control board 310 performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 310 has a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from a payout ball measuring switch 311 for detecting whether or not a game ball has been paid out, a door opening switch 312, and a timer, and performs arithmetic processing. and transmits corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on the processing. The output side of the payout control board 310 is connected with a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to pay out a predetermined prize. Pay out the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

The effect control board 320 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. This effect control board 320 includes a sub CPU 320a, a sub ROM 320b, and a sub RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 320b based on input signals from various commands, various units, the effect operation stick 136, and the timer received from the main control board 300, and performs arithmetic processing. Based on the processing, it transmits corresponding data to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 .

For example, when the sub CPU 320a in the effect control board 320 receives a variation start command from the main control board 300, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, the sword unit 154, the first character unit 155a, the second A production pattern for causing the character unit 155b, the first moonlight unit 156, the second moonlight unit 157, and the like to execute a game production is determined, and a production pattern designation command for executing the production pattern is sent to the image control board 330 or the lamp control. Send to board 340 . The details of the determination of the effect pattern will be described later.

The sub-ROM 320b stores programs for effect control, data necessary for determining various games, and a plurality of tables. Details of these tables will be described later.

The sub-RAM 320c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 320a, and stores game states, effect patterns, decoration symbols, counters, shooting operation information, and the like. Also, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a plurality of storage areas. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

The image control board 330 includes an image CPU, a control ROM, a control RAM, a CGROM, a VRAM, and a VDP (not shown) for performing image display control of the main display device 131, an audio CPU, an audio ROM, and an audio RAM. . The image control board 330 is connected to the performance control board 320 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the output side of the image control board 330 is connected to the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331 .

The image CPU performs control to display a predetermined image on the VDP based on the command received from the effect control board 320 . The control RAM functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. In addition, the control ROM stores programs for control processing of the image CPU, animation patterns for displaying animations based on production patterns, animation scene information, and the like.

The CGROM stores a large number of image data such as decorative patterns and backgrounds displayed on the main display device 131, and the image CPU executes a predetermined program based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. Along with reading out, predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is developed in the VRAM, and control is performed to display the image data developed in the VRAM on the main display device 131, thereby realizing a display effect.

In addition, the audio ROM stores a large number of audio data for output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a predetermined program based on the production pattern designation command transmitted from the production control board 320. At the same time, the audio output control in the audio output device 331 is performed to realize the audio effect.

The lamp control board 340 includes the firing handle device 103 provided on the glass frame 150, the frame illumination device 345 such as an LED built in the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180, and the sword unit provided on the game board unit 102. 154, the first character unit 155a, the second character unit 155b, the first moonlight unit 156, and the second moonlight unit 157 by controlling the lighting or blinking of the board lighting device 347 such as an LED built in, Realize The lamp control board 340 also includes a frame driving device 346 such as a motor for driving the firing handle device 103, the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180, the sword unit 154, the first character unit 155a, the second character unit. 155b, the first moonlight unit 156 and the second moonlight unit 157 are controlled to control a board driving device 348 such as a motor to realize a movable effect.

The firing control board 350 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and controls energization of the firing solenoid 353 and the ball feeding solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 352 .

The touch sensor 351 is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance due to the player touching the firing handle device 103, and detects that the player has touched the firing handle device 103. , outputs a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid 353 to the firing control board 350 .

The firing volume 352 is composed of a variable resistor. A constant voltage (eg, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 is divided by the variable resistor and the divided voltage is supplied to the firing control board 350 .

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 350 . As a result, the number of game balls shot per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shot solenoid rotates once. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

A touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and a voltage signal from the emission volume 352 are input to the effect control board 320 . As a result, the production control board 320 can detect the launch of the game ball.

The power supply board 360 includes a backup power supply 360a (hereinafter also referred to as a backup capacitor 360a) made up of a capacitor, and supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. FIG. Specifically, to the main control board 300 via the wiring 360b, to the payout control board 310 via the wiring 360c, to the effect control board 320 via the wiring 360d, to the firing control board 350 via the wiring 360e. power supply voltage via It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 100 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 301a stops operating. The backup power source 360a is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

[Explanation of game state]
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables and the like. Specifically, FIG. 5(A) shows a non-variable probability jackpot determination table T1A, FIG. 5(B) shows a probability variable jackpot determination table T1B, and FIG. 5(C) shows a normal symbol determination table T6. indicates

In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game state related to the jackpot determination can be set to a “non-probability variable game state” or a “probability variable game state”. Further, in the gaming machine 100, the game state related to the normal symbol determination can be set to a "non-time-saving game state" or a "time-saving game state". These game states are described below.

[Explanation of non-probability variation gaming state and probability variation gaming state]
In the jackpot determination in the non-probability variation gaming state, a non-probability variation jackpot determination table T1A shown in FIG. 5A is used. In the non-probable variable jackpot determination table T1A, jackpot values determined as jackpots in the jackpot determination are set to three numerical values "0" to "2". In the jackpot determination using the non-variable jackpot determination table T1A, the jackpot random number (any numerical value of "0" to "1199") obtained when entering the first starter 112 or the second starter 115 is If the winning value is one of the above three values, it is determined as a "big win", and if it is neither, it is determined as a "losing". That is, the probability (also referred to as a jackpot probability) of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot decision in the non-variable gaming state is 1/400.

In the jackpot determination in the variable probability state, a variable probability jackpot determination table T1B shown in FIG. 5B is used. The variable-probability jackpot determination table T1B is set to 20 numbers from "0" to "19" for jackpot values that are determined to be jackpots in the jackpot determination. In the jackpot determination using the variable probability jackpot determination table T1B, the jackpot random number (any numerical value from "0" to "1199") obtained when entering the first starter 112 or the second starter 115 is If it is one of the above 20 jackpot values, it is determined as "big hit", and if it is neither, it is determined as "losing". That is, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is 1/60.

Therefore, the probability variation gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-probability variation gaming state because the probability of a big hit in the big hit determination is set higher than the non-probability variation gaming state. In the case of the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming flag is set to "ON", and in the case of the non-probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming flag is "OFF". In addition, the transition from the non-probability variation gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, or the transition from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state can be executed after the jackpot game ends.

[Description of non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state]
As shown in FIG. 5 (C), the normal symbol determination table T6, in the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning value determined to hit is set only to "0", the normal symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state , 65535 hit values from "0" to "65534" are set.

In the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol random number (any number from "0" to "65535") obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 113b is the only one hit value "0". If it is, it is determined as "hit", and if it is not "0", it is determined as "losing". That is, the probability of being determined as winning in the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/65536.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol random number (any numerical value of "0" to "65535") obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 113b is one of the above 65535 hit values. If it is, it is determined as "hit", and if neither is true, it is determined as "losing". That is, the probability of being determined as winning in normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state is 65535/65536≈1/1.00002.

In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, after executing the determination of the normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 113b, the variation time from the start of the normal symbol variation to the stop display is 12 seconds. The opening control time is set to be relatively long, and the opening control time for opening the second starting device 115 by moving the movable piece 115b when winning is set to be 0.2 seconds, which is relatively short. That is, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, normal design determination is performed, the normal design is variably displayed on the normal design display device 118, and the variably displayed normal design is variably displayed. is stopped 12 seconds after the start. When the determination result is a hit, the second starting device 115 is opened for 0.2 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, after executing the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 113b, the variation time from the start of the normal symbol variation to the stop display is 3. The opening control time for opening the second starting device 115 by moving the movable piece 115b when winning is set to 2.5 seconds, which is relatively long. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 118, and the variably displayed normal symbol is the variably displayed. After 3 seconds from the start, the stop display is displayed. When the determination result is a hit, the second starting device 115 is opened for 2.5 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the stop display of the normal symbol.

As described above, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the hit probability of the normal design determination is set relatively low as 1/65536, and the normal design fluctuation time is set relatively long as 12 seconds, and the movable piece 115b is set to a relatively short opening control time of 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the hit probability of normal symbol determination is set relatively high at 65535/65536, and the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set relatively short at 3 seconds, and the movable piece 115b is opened. The control time is set to 2.5 seconds, which is relatively long.

Therefore, when the same number of game balls pass through the gate 113b, the second starting device 115 is more likely to be controlled to the open state in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. Thus, in the time-saving game state, the consumption of game balls is suppressed in the progress of the game, and the game can be progressed more advantageously for the player than in the non-time-saving game state. In the case of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game flag is set to "ON", and in the case of the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game flag is "OFF". In addition, the transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, or the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state can be executed after the jackpot game ends.

In the time-saving gaming state of the above-described embodiment, compared to the non-time-saving state, the probability of normal pattern determination is high, the normal pattern fluctuation time is short, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b is set long, Although the consumption of game balls is suppressed in the progress of the game, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, at least one of the normal pattern determination hit probability, the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b suppresses the consumption of the game ball. may be set to be For example, in the time-saving gaming state, in order to suppress the consumption of game balls, compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, may be set so that only the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened.

In the following, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are also referred to as the normal gaming state. The non-probability variable gaming state and the gaming state that is the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as the low-probability time-saving gaming state. The game state, which is the probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, is also called a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The game state which is the probability variable game state and the time saving game state is also called a high probability time saving game state (latent game state).
Also, the time-saving gaming state can be continuously performed for a predetermined number of fluctuations. The number of fluctuations in which the time saving gaming state is performed in this manner is also referred to as the number of time saving fluctuations.

[Description of jackpot game]
The jackpot game is executed when the jackpot game flag is ON, and includes an opening effect until the first big prize winning device 117 is first opened, and a plurality of round games in which the first big prize winning device 117 repeats opening and closing. , and an ending effect from when the first big winning device 117 is closed until the next variation of the special symbol is started. A round game refers to a period during which the first big winning device 117 is opened once, and includes a long open round game and a short open round game.

In the long open round game, when a specified number of game balls (nine in this embodiment) enter the first big winning device 117, one round game ends. Also, even if the specified number of game balls do not enter the game, one round game ends when the specified number of seconds (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses. In such a long-open round game, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the first big winning device 117, and the player can win prize balls corresponding to the entering balls, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained. is.

Further, when a long open round game is executed, the bonus state is entered until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the round game is completed, and the second big winning device 127 is activated for a specified number of seconds (0.5 seconds in this embodiment). , the game ball can be entered into the second big winning device 127 by repeating the opening state of . In addition, the predetermined condition is, for example, when it is determined to execute a jackpot game in the jackpot determination by entering the second starting device 115 in the bonus state, or when the round game is finished. is finished.

In this way, when a long opening round game is executed, a bonus state is entered after the round game is finished, and a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained by opening the second big winning device 127. It is arranged so that the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the short open round game, for example, the first big winning device 117 is opened for 0.1 seconds, and one round game ends. This is an open mode called so-called "paka", and is an open mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter. Therefore, when the short circuit is open, the game balls cannot be expected to enter the first big winning device 117, and almost no prize balls can be expected. Such a "jackpot game" is digested by so-called "right-handed hitting". Even if the game ball is short open, if the game ball enters the game ball, the prize ball will be awarded.

[Description of jackpot type]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot symbol determination table T2 and the allocation ratio of the jackpot types. FIG. 6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A, FIG. 6(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the extra 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B, and FIG. 6(C) is a jackpot FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a sorting ratio by type;

As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, in the special 1 jackpot pattern determination table T2A and the special 2 jackpot pattern determination table T2B in this embodiment, the jackpot patterns are "specific pattern A", "specific pattern B" and "Specific pattern C" is set. In these jackpot pattern determination tables T2A and T2B, random numbers (values) of 0 to 9 are assigned to specific patterns A to C, and the selection ratio of jackpot patterns is determined by the number of random numbers (values) assigned. ing.
Below, each jackpot pattern (jackpot type) and its selection ratio will be described.

(1) Specific symbol A: 16R probability variable jackpot Specific pattern A is a jackpot in which 16 long open round games are executed in the jackpot game. In the case of a big win with the specific pattern A, the big win with the specific pattern A is notified by stopping and displaying three decorative patterns in double eyes in the display performance on the main display device 131.例文帳に追加Further, when a big hit is made with the specific pattern A, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving game state after the big-hit game ends. The number of time reduction fluctuations at this time is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the first special symbol wins big, the winning value is "1,7", so the winning value is selected at a rate of 2/10. On the other hand, when the second special symbol results in a big hit, the winning values are "0, 1, 4, 6, 7, 9", so the selection is made at a rate of 6/10.
Also, after 16 long open round games have been executed, the second big winning device 127 is opened to enter a bonus state.
(2) Specific symbol B: 4R probability variable jackpot The specific pattern B is a jackpot in which four long open round games are executed in the jackpot game. In the case of a big hit with the specific pattern B, the big win with the specific pattern B is reported by stop-displaying three decorative patterns in doubles in the display effect on the main display device 131.例文帳に追加In addition, when a big hit is made with the specific pattern B, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving game state after the big-hit game ends. The number of time reduction fluctuations at this time is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6(A) and (B), when the first special symbol wins big, the winning values are "0, 2, 4, 5, 8, 9", so the ratio is 6/10. is selected by On the other hand, when the second special symbol results in a big hit, the winning values are "2, 5, 8", so the selection is made at a rate of 3/10.
(3) Specific Symbol C: 2R Probability Variation Big Hit The specific symbol C is a big hit in which two short open round games are executed in the big win game. In the case of a big hit with the specific pattern C, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the special pattern stops at the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, thereby announcing the big win with the specific pattern C.例文帳に追加The special symbol is, for example, a symbol described as "probability variation". Further, when a big hit is made with the specific symbol C, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving game state after the big-hit game ends. The number of time reduction fluctuations at this time is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), when the first special symbol results in a big win, the winning value is "3, 6", so selection is made at a rate of 2/10. On the other hand, when the second special symbol results in a big hit, the winning value is "3", so the selection is made at a rate of 1/10.
In addition, below, the specific pattern A is also called "Special A", the specific pattern B is also called "Special B", and the specific pattern C is also called "Special C".

As shown in FIG. 6(C), the distribution ratio of the jackpot type is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special pattern, the probability of being assigned to the 16R variable jackpot is "20%", the probability of being assigned to the 4R variable jackpot is "60%", and the probability of being assigned to the 2R variable jackpot is "20%". In the second special pattern, the probability of being assigned to the 16R variable jackpot is "60%", the probability of being assigned to the 4R variable jackpot is "30%", and the probability of being assigned to the 2R variable jackpot is "10%".

[Description of fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the first special first normal fluctuation pattern table T4A. As shown in FIG. 7, the first special first normal first variation pattern table T4A has 19 variation patterns from variation pattern 1 to variation pattern 10B. These variation patterns 1 to 10B will be explained.

In addition, in the first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A, there is a fluctuation pattern represented by "variation pattern" + "number" + "alphabet", but when "variation pattern" + "number" is the same Basically, the corresponding basic display effect has a similar variation pattern. For example, the variation pattern 2A and the variation pattern 2B are basically the same in that the corresponding basic effect is a normal reach (losing) effect, and may differ in whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed. Therefore, fluctuation patterns with the same "variation pattern" + "number" are considered to be the same kind of fluctuation pattern, and are collectively explained.

Note that the basic display effect is a base display effect, and is substantially the same effect such as the switching timing of the background image, the switching timing of the effect, or the appearance timing of the character.

[Variation pattern 1]
A variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern for executing a normal losing effect. This variation pattern 1 has a variation time of 5 seconds and is selected at a rate of 21/30 in the case of failure. This normal losing effect means that the main display device 131 does not perform the reach forming effect for forming the reach, and the losing pattern array (for example, “2”, “5”, “1 ”) is formed.

[Variation pattern 2]
A variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern for executing a normal reach (losing) effect as a basic effect. Of these patterns, the variation pattern 2A executes a normal reach (losing) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variable second of 10 seconds, and is selected at 2/30 of the loss. In the normal reach (losing) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the main display device 131, and after the reach formation effect for forming the reach is executed, the development effect is not executed, and the variable is changed. This is an effect in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern, and a losing pattern arrangement (for example, "7", "6", "7") is formed.

Here, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. Pseudo-continuous performance (or pseudo-continuous variable performance) means that during the variable display of special symbols, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and then variably displayed again, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It is a production that repeats in a pseudo manner. In this case, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. good.

In the variation pattern 2B, a normal reach (losing) effect (with a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the number of seconds of variation is 16 seconds, and 2/30 of the loss is selected. In this normal reach (losing) effect (pseudo-continuous effect), after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the main display device 131 and the reach formation effect for forming the reach is executed, the development effect is not executed, and the changing decoration is performed. This is an effect in which symbols different from the ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed to form a losing pattern array.

[Variation pattern 3]
Variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern in the case of executing a normal reach (per special C) effect. Variation pattern 3A executes a normal reach (special C hit) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 10 seconds, and is selected in the case of a big hit with a specific symbol C. In the normal reach (special C hit) production (no pseudo-continuous production), the pseudo-continuous production is not executed, and after the reach formation production is executed, the development production is not carried out, and the changing decorative pattern stops with a special pattern. This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array is displayed to represent a jackpot with a specific pattern C.

Variation pattern 3B executes a normal reach (special C hit) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 16 seconds, and is selected in the case of a big hit with a specific symbol C. In the normal reach (special C hit) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a special pattern without performing the development effect. This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot in the specific pattern C is formed.

[Variation pattern 4]
Variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern for executing SP reach (losing) effect. Variation pattern 4A executes an SP reach (loss) effect (no pseudo continuous effect), has a variation time of 30 seconds, and is selected at 3/60 of the loss. In the SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the reach forming effect is executed, the SP reach effect, which is one of the super reach effects, is executed as a development effect, and the loss is performed. This is an effect in which a pattern array is formed.

Variation pattern 4B executes an SP reach (loss) effect (with a pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 36 seconds, and is selected at 3/60 of the loss. In the SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the reach forming effect is executed, the SP reach effect, which is one of the super reach effects, is executed as a development effect, and the loss is performed. This is an effect in which a pattern array is formed.

[Variation pattern 5]
Variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern for executing SP reach (per special A, special B) effect. Variation pattern 5A executes SP reach (special A, special B hit) production (no pseudo continuous production), variation time is 30 seconds, 1/30 in case of big hit with specific pattern A or specific pattern B is selected by The SP reach (special A, special B hit) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed without the pseudo-continuous effect, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, and the specific symbol A or the specific symbol This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array (for example, "7", "7", "7") representing a jackpot in the pattern B is formed.

Variation pattern 5B executes SP reach (special A, special B hit) production (with pseudo continuous production), variation time is 36 seconds, 4/30 in case of big hit with specific pattern A or specific pattern B is selected by In the SP reach (per special A, special B) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, and the specific pattern A or the specific pattern B is executed. It is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot is formed.

[Variation pattern 6]
A variation pattern 6 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (losing) effect 1 . In the variation pattern 6A, the SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 1 (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 60 seconds, and the selection is 1/60 of the loss. The SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 1 (no pseudo-continuous effect) is one of the super ready-to-win effects as a development effect after the reach formation effect and the SP ready-to-win effect are executed without the pseudo-continuous effect being executed. This is an effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed and a losing pattern array is formed.

In the variation pattern 6B, the SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 1 (with pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the loss. In the SPSP reach (losing) production 1 (with pseudo-continuous production), the pseudo-continuous production is executed, and after the reach formation production and the SP reach production are executed, the SPSP reach, which is one of the super reach productions, is further produced as a development production. This is an effect in which an effect is executed and a losing pattern array is formed.

[Variation pattern 7]
Variation pattern 7 is a variation pattern for executing SPSP reach (per special A, special B) production 1. FIG. In variation pattern 7A, SPSP reach (special A, special B win) production 1 (non-pseudo-run) is executed, variation time is 60 seconds, and 3/30 in case of big hit with specific symbol A or specific symbol B. is selected by SPSP ready-to-win (for special A and special B) production 1 (no pseudo-running) is performed without pseudo-running, but after ready-to-win formation production and SP production are carried out, SPSP ready-to-win production is carried out and specific symbols are executed. This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern arrangement representing a jackpot in A or specific pattern B is formed.

In the variation pattern 7B, the SPSP reach (special A, special B hit) production 1 (with pseudo-run) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and 7/30 in the case of a big hit with a specific pattern A or a specific pattern B. is selected by SPSP reach (per special A, special B) production 1 (with pseudo consecutive), pseudo consecutive production is executed, reach formation production, SP production is executed, SPSP reach production is executed, specific symbol A or This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot in the specific pattern B is formed.

[Variation pattern 8]
A variation pattern 8 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (losing) effect 2 . In the variation pattern 8A, the SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 2 (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 60 seconds, and the selection is 1/60 of the loss. The SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 2 (no pseudo-continuous effect) is one of the super ready-to-win effects as a development effect after the ready-to-win formation effect and the SP ready-to-win effect are executed without the pseudo-continuous effect being executed. This is an effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed and a losing pattern array is formed.

In the variation pattern 8B, the SPSP ready-to-win (losing) effect 2 (with pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the loss. In the SPSP reach (losing) production 2 (with pseudo-continuous production), the pseudo-continuous production is executed, and after the reach formation production and the SP reach production are executed, the SPSP reach, which is one of the super reach productions, is further produced as a development production. This is an effect in which an effect is executed and a losing pattern array is formed.

[Variation pattern 9]
Variation pattern 9 is a variation pattern for executing SPSP reach (per special A, special B) production 2. In the variation pattern 9A, the SPSP reach (special A, special B win) effect 2 (no pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 60 seconds, and the specific pattern A or the specific pattern B is 3/3 in the case of a big hit. 30 is selected. SPSP reach (per special A, special B) production 2 (no pseudo-continuous production) is performed without pseudo-continuous production, and after the reach formation production and SP production are executed, the SPSP reach production is executed and specified. This is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot in the pattern A or the specific pattern B is formed.

In the variation pattern 9B, the SPSP reach (special A, special B win) production 2 (with pseudo-continuous production) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and the special symbol A or the special symbol B is 7/7 in the case of a big hit. 30 is selected. SPSP ready-to-win (special A, special B hit) production 2 (with pseudo-continuous production) is executed by pseudo-continuous production, and after ready-to-win formation production and SP production are carried out, SPSP ready-to-win production is carried out, and specific symbol A is executed. Alternatively, it is an effect in which a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot in the specific pattern B is formed.

[Variation pattern 10]
The variation pattern 10 is a variation pattern for executing SPSP reach revival (per special A, special B) effect. In the variation pattern 10A, the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B hit) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 80 seconds, and 1/ 30 is selected. SPSP reach revival (special A, special B hit) production (no pseudo-continuous production) is performed without pseudo-continuous production, reach formation production, SP production, SPSP reach production, and once with a losing pattern arrangement After the temporary stop display, a resurrection performance for re-varying the decorative symbols is executed to form a jackpot pattern arrangement representing a jackpot in the specific pattern A or the specific pattern B. - 特許庁

In the variation pattern 10B, the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B hit) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 86 seconds, and the special pattern A or the special pattern B is 4/4 in the case of a big hit. 30 is selected. In the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B) production (with pseudo-continuous production), the pseudo-continuous production is executed, the reach formation production, the SP production, and the SPSP reach production are executed, and temporarily stopped at the losing pattern arrangement. After being displayed, a resurrection effect of changing the decorative pattern again is executed to form a jackpot pattern arrangement representing a jackpot in the specific pattern A or the specific pattern B. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a display effect based on the variation pattern, the expectation that the SP reach effect will be a bigger hit than the case where the normal reach effect is performed (hereinafter also referred to as the big hit expectation ) is set high. In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern is set so that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed than when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

Next, in the first variation pattern table T4, the first variation pattern table T4B for the first special 1 probability variation, the first variation pattern table T4C for the first special 2 normal time, and the first variation pattern table T4D for the first special 2 probability variation Although not shown, it will be described below based on a comparison with the first special first normal time first variation pattern table T4A.

The 1st special 1 probability variable time 1st variation pattern table T4B has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11 to 20B), and the variation patterns 12A to 20B of these variation patterns are the 1st special 1 normal They are the same as the 18 variation patterns (variation patterns 2A to 10B) of the first variation pattern table T4A. The variation pattern 11 included in the 1st special 1 probability variation first variation pattern table T4B is a variation pattern for executing a normal losing effect like the variation pattern 1 included in the 1st special 1 normal time 1st variation pattern table T4A. However, compared to the variation pattern 1, the variation time is longer, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds.

The first special 2 normal first variation pattern table T4C has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21 to 30B), and these variation patterns 21 to 30B are the first special 1 normal first variation pattern They are the same as the 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1 to 10B) of the table T4A.

The 1st special 2 probability variable time 1st variation pattern table T4D has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31 to 40B). Of these variation patterns, variation patterns 32A to 40 are the same as the 18 variation patterns (variation patterns 2A to 10B) of the first special first normal first variation pattern table T4A. The variation pattern 31 included in the 1st Special 2 Probability Variation 1st variation pattern table T4D is a variation pattern for executing a normal losing effect in the same manner as the variation pattern 1 included in the 1st Special 1 Normal time 1st variation pattern table T4A. However, compared to the variation pattern 1, the variation time is shorter, and the variation time is set to 2 seconds.

Next, in the second fluctuation pattern table T5, the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 probability variable fluctuation pattern table T5B, the second special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T5C, and the second special 2 probability fluctuation Although not shown, the hourly variation pattern table T5D will be described below based on a comparison with the first variation pattern table T4.

The second special first normal fluctuation pattern table T5A has 19 fluctuation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effects as the variation patterns 1 to 10B of the first special 1 normal first variation pattern table T4A, respectively. , 1st special 1 normal time 1st variation patterns 1 to 10B included in the normal time 1st variation pattern table T4A, respectively, the variation time is set longer by about 10 seconds.

The 2nd special 1 probability variation variation pattern table T5B has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic production as the variation patterns 11 to 20B of the first special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T4B, respectively. Compared to the variation patterns 11 to 20B of the 1 special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T4B, each variation time is set longer by about 10 seconds.

The second special second normal fluctuation pattern table T5C has 19 fluctuation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effect as the variation patterns 21 to 30B of the first special second normal time variation pattern table T4C, respectively. 1 Special 2 Each variation time is set longer by about 10 seconds than the variation patterns 21 to 30B of the normal variation pattern table T4C.

The second special second probability variation variation pattern table T5D has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic production as the variation patterns 31 to 40B of the first special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D, respectively. Compared to the variation patterns 31 to 40B included in the 2 special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D, each variation time is set longer by about 10 seconds.

That is, each variation pattern in the second variation pattern table T5 is set to have a variation time about 10 seconds longer than each corresponding variation pattern in the first variation pattern table T4.

[Processing list in main control board 300]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300. As shown in FIG.
Main CPU301a of the main control board 300 will perform a main process based on the program stored in main ROM301b, if a power supply is supplied. As main processing, the main CPU 301a executes power restoration processing for restoring the game state before the power shutdown, or RAM clear processing for initializing the main RAM 301c. In addition, the main CPU 301a updates the initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers) as main processing.
Further, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing at regular intervals (for example, 4 millisecond intervals) during execution of the main processing. Various types of timer interrupt processing will be described below.

[Random number update process]
First, the main CPU 301a executes random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal pattern random numbers are updated. These random numbers are incremented by "1" each time this process is performed. Each random number is reset to "0" after reaching a preset maximum value.

[Switch processing]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs switch processing. This switch processing is executed when a detection signal is input from each switch. The switch process includes a starting device switch process, a gate switch process, a first big prize device switch process, a second big prize device switch process, and the like. The starting device switch process includes a preliminary determination process.

[Starting device switch processing]
As a starting device switch process, the main CPU 301a acquires a jackpot random number, a jackpot pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number when a ball is entered into the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, and These are stored as pending information in the pending information storage area 301cx (holding information area: see FIG. 4-2(B)) of the main RAM 301c. For example, when the game ball enters the first starting device 112 and acquires the hold information for the first special symbol, the main CPU 301a stores the hold information in the hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the hold information storage area 301cx. is stored, and the pending information is stored in the pending information area that should be preferentially stored next to the pending information area. However, if pending information is stored in the fourth pending information area, the pending information is not stored. Similar processing is performed when the reservation information for the second special symbol is acquired.

In addition, when storing the pending information in the pending information storage area 301cx (holding information storage area) as the starting device switch process, the main CPU 301a stores the pending order information at the time of acquisition in the pending information area in association with the pending information. to store In this case, when the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is not stored in the hold information area, the hold information will be stored in the first hold information area. , becomes “1”.

[Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the pre-determination process executed by the CPU 301a of the main control board 300. As shown in FIG. The main CPU 301a executes the preliminary determination process during the starting device switch process described above. In this pre-determination process, when the ball is entered into the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, the acquired hold information and hold order information at the time of acquisition are stored in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information area). Big hit determination, big hit pattern determination, reach determination, and variation pattern determination are performed based on the reservation information. That is, in this advance determination process, the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage area 301cx (suspension information area) is shifted to the suspension information determination area 301cy, and before the special symbol determination is executed, the jackpot determination is performed. It is a process for specifying in advance the result, the result of jackpot symbol determination, the result of reach determination, and the result of variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the process of S1001, the main CPU 301a executes a big win determination based on the acquired reservation information (big win random number) and determines whether or not it is a big win. When the main CPU 301a determines that it is a big win (S1001: YES), it executes a big win pattern determination in the process of S1002, specifies a big win pattern (specific patterns A, B, C) as special symbols, After that, the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that it is not a big win (S1001: NO), that is, when it determines that it is a loss, it identifies a losing symbol as a special symbol in the processing of S1003, and then proceeds to S1004. do. Next, in the process of S1004, the main CPU 301a executes variation pattern determination to specify a variation pattern. Subsequently, the main CPU 301a generates a pending command in the process of S1005. In this pending command, the pending additional information indicating that the pending information has been added to the pending information storage area 301cx, the specified special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the special symbol for prior determination), and the specified above It includes a variation pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a pre-determination variation pattern) and acquisition pending order information associated with the pending information. The special symbol for preliminary determination, the variation pattern for preliminary determination, and the reservation order information at the time of acquisition are also collectively referred to as preliminary determination information.

[Gate switch processing]
Further, as a gate switch process, the main CPU 301a acquires a normal symbol random number and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 301c when a game ball passes through the gate 113b.

[First Grand Prize Device Switch Processing]
The main CPU 301a, as the first big winning device switch process, detects the game ball that has won the first big winning device 117 while the big winning game is being executed (during the big winning game state). In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of game balls paid out to the player based on the winning to the first big prize winning device 117 in the jackpot game state, in the obtained/discharged ball equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c. It is added to the number represented by the acquired/deposited ball equivalent information that is stored (accumulated).

Further, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main CPU 301a resets (deletes) the acquired ball-equivalent information stored in the acquired ball-equivalent information storage area 301cz. As a result, the acquired and released ball equivalent information stored in the acquired and released ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is shifted to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of the first big win and while the time reduction game state continues. It represents the sum with the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. In other words, the number represented by the acquired/discharged ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state during consecutive wins.

Furthermore, in the first big winning device switch process, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired ball-equivalent information command representing the acquired ball-equivalent information when the acquired ball-equivalent information is updated.

[Second big winning device switch process]
The main CPU 301a, as the second big winning device switch process, detects a game ball that has won the second big winning device 127 while the big winning game is being executed (at the time of the big winning game state). In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of game balls paid out to the player based on the winning to the second big winning device 127 in the jackpot gaming state, in the acquired/discharged ball equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c. It is added to the number represented by the acquired/deposited ball equivalent information that is stored (accumulated).

Further, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main CPU 301a resets (deletes) the acquired ball-equivalent information stored in the acquired ball-equivalent information storage area 301cz. As a result, the acquired and released ball equivalent information stored in the acquired and released ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is shifted to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of the first big win and while the time reduction game state continues. It represents the sum with the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. In other words, the number represented by the acquired/discharged ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state during consecutive wins.

Furthermore, in the second big winning device switch process, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired ball-equivalent information command representing the acquired ball-equivalent information when the acquired ball-equivalent information is updated.

[Special symbol processing]
After the switch process, the main CPU 301a performs a special symbol process, which is a process related to special symbols. The special symbol processing includes a reservation information shift process, a jackpot determination process, a jackpot symbol determination process, a reach determination process, a variation pattern setting process, and a special symbol stop process. Each processing of special design processing is explained below.

[Holding information shift process]
The main CPU 301a executes a hold information shift process. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the main CPU 301a shifts the pending information and the acquisition pending order information in the pending information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c. For example, in the pending information storage area 301cx, the main CPU 301a stores the pending information for the first special symbol in the first pending information area and the second pending information area, and stores the pending information for the second special symbol. When the variable display of the special symbols is completed in a state in which the 1, the pending information in the pending information area and the acquisition pending order information are shifted to the pending information determination area 301cy of the main RAM 301c.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes the jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number and the jackpot determination table T1 included in the pending information shifted to the pending information determination area 301cy by the pending information shift process. In this case, when the gaming state is the non-probability variable gaming state, the non-probability variation jackpot determination table T1A is used, and in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation jackpot determination table T1B is used.

[Jackpot pattern determination process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is completed, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 301a stores the jackpot symbol random number and the jackpot symbol determination table T2 included in the pending information shifted by the pending information shift process. Based on this, a big hit design determination is executed to determine a big hit design (special design). In this case, when the type of the shifted pending information is the first special symbol, using the special 1 jackpot design determination table T2A, when the type of the shifted pending information is the second special symbol, special 2 A jackpot symbol determination table T2B is used. On the other hand, the main CPU 301a determines a predetermined losing symbol (special symbol) when the big hit determination is a loss.

[Reach determination process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes reach determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes reach determination based on the reach determination table T3 and the reach random number included in the shifted hold information. In this case, when the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reservation information is the first special symbol, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is used. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the type of the reservation information is the first special symbol, the special 1 probability variation reach determination table is used. When the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reservation information is the second special symbol, the special 2 normal time reach determination table is used. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the type of the reservation information is the second special symbol, the special 2 probability variation reach determination table is used.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes variation pattern setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a first determines whether to select the first variation pattern table T4 or the second variation pattern table T5 based on the reservation order information at acquisition. For example, if the pending order information at acquisition is "3" or "4", select the first variation pattern table T4, and if the pending order information at acquisition is "1" or "2" selects the second variation pattern table T5.

Next, the main CPU 301a selects which of the four variation pattern tables included in the selected variation pattern table to use based on the game state and the type of the special symbol. For example, when the first variation pattern table T4 is selected above, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T4A to T4D of the first variation pattern table T4. In this case, when the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reserved information is the first special symbol, the first special first normal fluctuation pattern table T4A is used. When the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state and the type of the reserved information is the first special symbol, the first special 1 probability variable time variation pattern table T4B is used. When the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reservation information is the second special symbol, the first special second normal fluctuation pattern table T4C is used. When the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state and the type of the reserved information is the second special symbol, the first special second variable probability variation pattern table T4D is used.

Also, for example, when the second variation pattern table T5 is selected above, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T5A to T5D of the second variation pattern table T5. In this case, when the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reservation information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A is used. When the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state and the type of the reservation information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 probability variable time variation pattern table T5B is used. When the game state is the non-probability variable game state and the type of the reserved information is the second special symbol, the second special second normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C is used. When the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state and the type of the reserved information is the second special symbol, the second special second probability variable time variation pattern table T5D is used.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot symbol determination, the result of the ready-to-win determination, the variation pattern random number included in the shifted reservation information, and the selected variation pattern table, and determines the variation pattern. to decide. In this case, for example, when a specific pattern is determined as a result of judging the jackpot pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the performance contents of the specific pattern is selected from among the variation patterns in the selected variation pattern table. Further, when it is determined as a result of the reach determination that the reach is performed, the variation pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect for executing the reach is selected from among the variation patterns in the selected variation pattern table. After determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 301a sets a variation start command including the determined variation pattern.

[Special symbol stop processing]
Further, the main CPU 301a executes special symbol stop processing. Specifically, after the variation pattern setting process, the main CPU 301a variably displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122, based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination. When time elapses, the changing special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the big win symbol determination is notified by the stopped and displayed special symbols. In this case, the main CPU 301a sets a symbol confirmation command.

Further, in the special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 301a stops and displays the changing special symbol, and then determines whether or not to turn on the big winning game flag based on the determination result of the big winning symbol determination, and determines that it is turned on. If so, the process of turning on the jackpot game flag is executed.

In this special symbol processing, the main CPU301a, when the time reduction game flag and the probability variation game flag are ON, when the number of time reduction fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), these time reduction game flag and probability variation game flag is also turned off.

[Normal pattern processing]
The main CPU 301a performs normal symbol processing. The normal symbol processing includes normal symbol determination processing, operation pattern setting processing, and opening/closing member control processing. Each processing of the normal symbol processing will be described below.

[Normal symbol determination process]
The main CPU 301a executes normal symbol determination processing. Specifically, when there is normal symbol reserved information, the main CPU 301a executes normal symbol determination based on the normal symbol random number included in the reserved information and the normal symbol determination table T6.

[Operation pattern setting process]
When the main CPU 301a determines that the win is determined in the normal symbol determination, the main CPU 301a performs operation pattern setting processing of the movable piece 115b. Specifically, the main CPU 301a sets an operation pattern that opens twice for 0.1 seconds when it is in the non-time-saving gaming state (total opening control time is 0.2 seconds), and when it is in the time-saving gaming state sets an operation pattern that opens five times for 0.5 seconds (total opening control time is 2.5 seconds). The main CPU 301a does not set the operation pattern when the normal symbol determination result is a failure.

[Opening/closing pattern control process]
The main CPU 301a executes opening/closing member control processing. Specifically, after executing the normal symbol determination, the main CPU 301a variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 118, and stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. In this case, the number of seconds of variation of normal symbols is set to 12 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, and is set to 3 seconds in the time-saving game state. After stopping and displaying the normal symbols, the main CPU 301a controls opening and closing of the movable piece 115b based on the operation pattern if an operation pattern is set in the operation pattern setting process.

[Large winning device opening control process]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs a big winning device opening control process. This big winning device opening control process includes opening pattern setting processing and game state setting processing for the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 .

[Open pattern setting process]
When the jackpot game flag is ON, the main CPU 301a sets the opening pattern of the first big prize winning device 117 and the second big prize winning device 127 based on the result of the jackpot symbol determination during the opening effect. Perform setting processing. When the opening effect is finished, the main CPU 301a performs opening/closing control of the first big winning device 117 based on the set opening pattern, thereby realizing a round game. In addition, when the round game continues for 16 rounds, when the game of 16 rounds by the first big prize winning device 117 is completed (the first big prize winning device 117 is closed), the second big prize game is executed based on the set opening pattern. Opening and closing control of the winning device 127 is performed to realize a bonus game.

[Game state setting process]
In addition, when the ending effect ends, the main CPU 301a executes a process of turning off the jackpot game flag, a time saving game flag, and a process of turning on the variable probability game flag, and sets the number of time saving fluctuations to a predetermined number of times (for example, , 8000 times) is performed.

[Payment process]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a executes payout processing. This payout process is a process for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning of game balls.

[Command transmission processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes command transmission processing. In this command transmission process, various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 301c in the above process and information necessary for determining the content of the effect are transmitted to the effect control board 320. FIG.

[Electrical Configuration of Production Control Board 320]
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. As shown in FIG. The production control board 320 determines a production pattern based on commands (including variation patterns, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 300, and sends production pattern designation commands based on the production pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331 are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the lamp control board 340 includes the frame lighting device 345, the board lighting device 347, A frame driving device 346 and a board driving device 348 are electrically connected. With such a configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 execute display effects, sound effects, lighting effects, and character movement effects based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-ROM 320b stores a basic display effect specification table TS1, a decorative symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3.

The basic display effect designation table TS1 is based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, the above-mentioned normal losing effect, normal reach (losing or winning) effect, SP reach (losing or winning) effect, SPSP reach (losing or winning) effect. One of the hit) effect 1, the SPSP reach (losing or winning) effect 2, and the SPSP reach revival (win) effect is the main effect in the display effect (hereinafter also referred to as the basic display effect). This is a table for specifying as In this embodiment, the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display effects correspond one-to-one.

A plurality of basic display effects may be associated with the variation pattern, and the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select the basic display effect by lottery. In this way, even if the variation pattern is the same, the effect content can be changed. Also, one basic display effect may correspond to a plurality of variation patterns.

The decorative symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining a combination of decorative symbols for temporary stop display and fixed stop display, and a ready-to-win symbol for executing ready-to-win in the display effect based on the effect pattern.

The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in the display effect. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect for executing a display effect different from the normal effect and increasing the expectation of a big win compared to the normal effect.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a reserve storage area 320c1, an obtained ball-equivalent information storage area 320c2, and a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3.

The reserved storage area 320c1 includes the first reserved area, the second reserved area, the third reserved area, and the fourth reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol, the second It is divided into eight areas, a reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area, each of which can store one reservation flag. In the reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation storage area 320c1, the priority order of storage of the reservation flag is the first reservation area to be stored with the highest priority, and the reservation flag is stored in the first reservation area. For example, next, the second reservation area is preferentially targeted for storage, then the third reservation area is preferentially targeted for storage, and finally the fourth reservation area is selected for storage. The same applies to the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the production control board 320 receives the pending command from the main control board 300, the pending area in which the pending flag is stored is specified in the pending storage area 320c1, and the pending area to be preferentially stored next to the pending area. store the pending flag in . However, if the pending command is received while the pending flag is stored in the fourth pending area, the pending flag is not stored.

Also, the order of priority for erasing the pending flag is the reverse of the order of priority for storing it. Then, the third reservation area is preferentially targeted for erasure, then the second reservation area is preferentially targeted for erasure, and finally the first reservation area is selected for erasure. When the performance control board 320 receives the symbol determination command from the main control board 300, the reservation area in which the reservation flag is stored is specified in the reservation storage area 320c1, and the reservation flag of the reservation area to be preferentially erased is erased. . If the reservation flag is not stored in the first reservation area, the deletion process is not performed.

The acquired ball-equivalent information storage area 320c2 is an area for storing the acquired ball-equivalent information indicated by the acquired ball-equivalent information command transmitted from the main control board 300. FIG. This acquired ball-equivalent information is overwritten and saved each time an acquired ball-equivalent information command is transmitted.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the prior determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing the pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variation pattern and acquisition reservation order information), corresponding to the type of special symbol, respectively , four storage areas (first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area) are provided. In addition, each storage area has a jackpot determination information column for storing jackpot determination information based on the special symbols for preliminary determination, a jackpot pattern information column for storing jackpot pattern information based on the symbols for preliminary determination, and a variation for preliminary determination. Variation pattern information column for storing variation pattern information based on patterns, Acquisition pending order information column for storing acquisition pending order information, Continuous performance presence/absence information for storing continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether continuous performance is activated A column and a are provided. Although details will be described later, the continuous effect presence/absence information includes continuous effect activation information and continuous effect non-activation information.

The hold command (FIG. 9: S1005) transmitted from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variation pattern, and hold order information at the time of acquisition). The prior determination information storage area 320c3 stores these prior determination information in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing the pre-determination information is that the first storage area is the storage target with the highest priority, and if the pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area, then, The second storage area is preferentially targeted for storage, then the third storage area is preferentially targeted for storage, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as an object for storage. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state where the pre-determination information is already stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the pre-determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, reservation order information "4 ”) is stored (see FIG. 11), information representing “4” is stored in the acquisition reservation order information column of the fourth storage area, and “Variation pattern 7B ", information representing "specific symbol A" is stored in the jackpot symbol information column of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area.

In addition, in FIG. 11, as the preliminary determination information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information of "losing" in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "none" in the jackpot pattern information column, and the variation pattern information column information of "variation pattern 1" is stored in the column, and information representing "3" is stored in the reservation order information column at the time of acquisition. As the pre-determination information in the second storage area, "Loss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot pattern information column, and "Variation pattern 2AX" information in the variation pattern information column. Information indicating "1" is stored in each reservation order information column. As the pre-determination information in the third storage area, "Loss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot pattern information column, and "Variation pattern 4BX" information in the variation pattern information column. Information indicating "2" is stored in each of the reservation order information columns.

Further, in the continuous effect presence/absence information column, continuous effect activation information indicating whether or not to execute a continuous effect is stored in a look-ahead process described later. In addition, in FIG. 11, in the continuous effect presence/absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, "○" is indicated as the continuous effect activation information, which is information indicating the activation of the continuous effect, and other storage is performed. In the area, "-" is shown as continuous effect non-execution information, which is information indicating that the continuous effect is not to be activated.

The sub-RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) in which predetermined flags and the like are stored. For example, in this flag storage area, a continuous execution effect flag, a pseudo continuous effect execution flag, etc., which will be described later, are stored.

[Processing list of production control board 320]
FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the effect control board 320. As shown in FIG. The sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 executes the effect main process when the power is supplied.

[Direction main processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes, as the effect main process, a power recovery effect process corresponding to the power restore process executed by the main control board 300, or a RAM clear effect process corresponding to the RAM clear process executed by the main control board 300. do.
Also, the sub CPU 320a repeatedly executes the effect timer interrupt process at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during execution of the effect main process. In addition, the processing performed by such effect control board 320 is performed based on the program stored in sub ROM320b.

[Production timer interrupt processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes a random number update process, a command reception process, an effect button process, and a command transmission process in the effect timer interrupt process. Below, various processings of production timer interruption processing are explained.

[Random number update process]
The sub CPU 320a updates various random numbers (for example, decorative symbol determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers) used for effects as random number update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a updates various random numbers by adding "1" to them, and resets them to "0" when they reach a predetermined value.

[Command reception processing]
The sub CPU 320a performs, as command reception processing, look-ahead processing, effect pattern determination processing, suspension processing, advance determination information shift processing, normal pattern effect processing, symbol determination processing, acquired ball-equivalent information storage processing, Execute the jackpot process. Various processes of the command reception process will be described below.

[Read ahead processing]
The look-ahead process executes a process of determining whether or not to perform a continuous effect based on a hold command transmitted from the main control board 300, and a process of determining whether or not to perform a pseudo-continuous effect. Details of this prefetch processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 .

Note that the continuous effect is a effect that can be executed on the main display device 131, and is a effect that can be executed during a variable start effect, which will be described later, over a plurality of variable displays of special symbols. This continuous effect may consist of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the continuous performance includes multiple types of performances, one performance may be selected and executed from the multiple types of performances. Also, the continuous effect may be executed for one time variation display in the special symbol.

Also, the pseudo-continuous effect may consist of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the pseudo-continuous effect includes a plurality of types of effects, one of the plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed.

[Production pattern determination process]
As effect pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 320a determines a effect pattern based on the basic display effect designation table TS1, the decorative symbol determination table TS2, and the chance up determination table TS3. The details of this effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Hold process]
The sub CPU 320a, as a pending process, when receiving a pending command from the main control board 300 and when the pending flag is not stored in the fourth pending area of the pending storage area 320c1 provided in the sub RAM 320c, Store the reserve flag in the reserve area with the highest storage priority. For example, when the sub CPU 320a receives a pending command with pending flags stored in the first and second pending areas, it stores the pending flag in the third pending area. Further, as a suspension process, the sub CPU 320a erases one suspension flag from a suspension area with a high priority for erasing a suspension flag when an effect pattern is determined in the effect pattern determination process (when a variation start command is received). do. The sub CPU 320a erases the reservation flag in the fourth reservation area when the production pattern is determined (when the variation start command is received) while the reservation flag is stored in the first to fourth reservation areas. .

Further, the sub CPU 320a executes a process related to the pending display as the pending process. Specifically, a pending display command for performing a pending display on the main display device 131 is set in association with the four pending areas of the pending storage area 320c1. For example, in the pending storage area 320c1, when pending flags are stored in the first to third pending areas, the main display device 131 sets a pending display command indicating that there are three pending. This pending display command is transmitted to the image control board 330 in the command transmission process described later. When receiving the pending display command, the image control board 330 controls the main display device 131 to execute the pending display based on the pending display command.

[Preliminary judgment information shift processing]
Sub CPU320a is stored in the storage area of the prior determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub RAM320c when the effect pattern is determined in the effect pattern determination process (when the variation start command is received) as the shift processing of the prior determination information. shift processing of the pre-determined information is executed. For example, when the advance determination information is stored as shown in FIG. 11 and the advance determination information is to be shifted, the information stored in the first storage area is erased and the Information is shifted into a first storage area, information stored in a third storage area is shifted into a second storage area, and information stored in a fourth storage area is shifted into a third storage area. Therefore, the number of pre-determination information (big hit determination information, big hit pattern information, variation pattern information set) stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and the number of the main control board 300 The number of pending information for the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 301c (holding information storage area 301cx: see FIG. 4-2) corresponds one-to-one. Similarly, the number of pre-determination information stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (one set of jackpot determination information, jackpot pattern information, and variation pattern information) and the main control board The number of pending information for the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 301c (holding information storage area 301cx) of 300 corresponds one-to-one. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, if the preliminary determination information is stored in all of the first storage area to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol, the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300 (holding information storage area 301cx) The number of pending information for the first special symbol stored in is also four.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the reservation information, and when the special symbol is stopped and the next symbol variation is performed, the second special symbol Special symbol determination is performed by preferentially using the reservation information. Therefore, in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3, when the pre-determination information is stored in each of the storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next When shifting to the variation effect of , shift processing of the advance determination information of the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

[Normal symbol effect processing]
In the normal symbol effect processing, an effect corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is performed in a predetermined area of the main display device 131 (for example, the corner of the main display device 131) according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. For example, while the normal symbols are fluctuating, "○" and "X" are displayed alternately.

[Design confirmation process]
The sub CPU 320a executes a process for finalizing and stopping display of the changing decorative pattern on the main display device 131 based on the pattern fixing command from the main control board 300 as the pattern fixing process.

[Acquisition ball equivalent information storage processing]
When the sub CPU 320a receives an acquired ball-equivalent information command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 320a stores the acquired ball-equivalent information stored in the sub RAM 320c as the acquired ball-equivalent information storage process. Store in area 320c2.

[Jackpot processing]
As jackpot processing, the sub CPU 320a receives a predetermined command from the main control board 300 to perform an opening process for executing an opening effect at the beginning of the jackpot game, and a round effect corresponding to the round game during the jackpot game. A round process for execution and an ending process for executing an ending effect are executed at the end of the jackpot game.

[Production button processing]
As effect button processing, the sub CPU 320a detects an input via the sword handle unit 135 or the effect operation stick 136, and performs a predetermined effect accordingly.

[Command transmission processing]
The sub CPU 320a transmits commands set in the various processes described above to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 as command transmission processing.

[Explanation of read-ahead processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of prefetch processing. Here, the prefetching process described above will be described below.
In this prefetching process, first, the sub CPU 320a executes the pending command reception process in the process of S1305. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control board 300, and if a hold command has been received, the pre-determination information included in the hold command is stored in the corresponding pre-determination information storage area 320c3. Store in the area. When the pending command is not received, the pre-reading process is terminated without executing the continuous effect flag setting process and the pseudo continuous effect flag setting process which will be described later.

Subsequently, after the pending command reception process, the sub CPU 320a executes the continuous effect flag setting process in the process of S1310. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the advance determination information received in the process of S1305. , determines whether or not to turn on the continuous effect flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines that the continuous effect flag is turned ON when both the following two conditions A and B are satisfied. It is determined that the flag is not turned ON.

Condition A: In the advance judgment information storage area 320c3, the advance judgment information (jackpot judgment information column) stored before the advance judgment information newly stored in the processing of S1305 does not contain information indicating a big win. In other words, there is no jackpot in the pending information in the pending information storage area 301cx before the pre-determination information is stored in the process of S1305.
Condition B: Winning the pre-reading lottery.

As an example of the above condition A, the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol does not store the pre-determination information, while the first storage area to the third storage area corresponding to the first special symbol respectively preliminarily It is assumed that the determination information is stored, and the pre-determination information is newly stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the process of S1305 (see FIG. 11). In this case, if there is no information indicating a big hit in the prior determination information (big hit determination column) stored in the first storage area to the third storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, the above condition A is satisfied.

Further, in the pre-reading lottery under the condition B, if the pre-determination special pattern included in the pre-determination information newly stored in the processing of S1305 is a losing pattern, a lottery is performed with the first pre-reading lottery probability, and the jackpot pattern is selected. In the case of , the lottery is set to be performed with a second prefetching lottery probability, which is higher in expectation of winning than the first prefetching lottery probability. As a result, the probability of execution of the read-ahead performance is set high in the case of a big win, in other words, when the read-ahead performance appears, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the look-ahead performance does not appear.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless both conditions A and B are satisfied, the continuous effect flag is not turned ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , a continuous effect flag may be turned ON.

When it is determined that the continuous effect flag is turned ON, continuous effect activation information (“○” in FIG. ). When it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not turned ON, in the advance determination information storage area 320c3, continuous effect non-execution information ("- ”).

Sub CPU320a, when continuous effect activation information or continuous effect non-activation information is stored in the continuous effect presence/absence information column, or when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM320c is already ON, the following The process proceeds to S1315.

In addition, when the continuous effect flag is turned ON and the continuous effect activation information "○" is stored in the continuous effect presence/absence information column of the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3, the main display device will be displayed from the next special symbol fluctuation display. At 131, a continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect can be executed until the display effect is executed based on the pending information corresponding to the advance determination information including the continuous effect activation information. In this case, it can be executed even during the display effect based on the pending information corresponding to the advance determination information including the continuous effect activation information.

Further, in the case where the continuous effect flag is set to ON in the continuous effect flag setting process, the sub CPU 320a, when the variable display corresponding to the preliminary determination information used for determination ends, in the above-described symbol determination process, A continuous effect flag is set to OFF.

Subsequently, after the continuous effect flag setting process, the sub CPU 320a executes the pseudo continuous effect flag setting process in the process of S1315. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON, the sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c to OFF. When the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c to ON. After that, this prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the command receiving process.

In addition, in the effect pattern determination process described later, even if the acquired variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect (for example, variation pattern 7B), the sub-CPU 320a performs the pseudo-continuous effect flag setting process. When the continuous effect flag is set to OFF (when the continuous effect flag is ON), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

[Description of production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart of effect pattern determination processing. In this effect pattern determination process, first, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 300 (S1405). If the sub CPU 320a has not received the variation start command (S1405: NO), it ends this effect pattern determination process and returns to the command reception process. When the sub CPU 320a receives the fluctuation start command (S1405: YES), it acquires the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command in the process of S1410.

Next, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern in the process of S1415. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines the effect pattern by determining the basic display effect, determining the continuous effect, determining the pseudo-continuous effect, determining the ready-to-win symbol, determining the chance up, and determining the stop symbol. do. Details of this will be described below.

First, the sub CPU 320a determines the effect corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 as the basic display effect based on the basic display effect designation table TS1. For example, when the acquired variation pattern is the variation pattern 6B, the sub CPU 320a determines the SPSP ready-to-win (lost) effect 1, which is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern 6B, as the basic display effect based on the basic display effect designation table TS1. .

Next, the sub CPU 320a determines execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON. When the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines non-execution of the continuous effect.

Next, when the pseudo-continuous effect flag stored in the sub-RAM 320c is ON and the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect, the sub CPU 320a decide to execute. For example, the sub CPU 320a executes the pseudo-continuous effect when the pseudo-continuous effect flag stored in the sub-RAM 320c is ON and the variation pattern obtained in the processing of S1410 is "variation pattern 4B". to decide.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect flag stored in the sub-RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not the variation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect. Decide not to run. For example, when the pseudo-continuous effect flag stored in the sub-RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a performs the pseudo-continuous effect even though the variation pattern obtained in the process of S1410 is "variation pattern 4B". Decide not to run.

That is, when the continuous effect flag is ON, the pseudo continuous effect flag is OFF, so when the continuous effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the continuous effect flag is OFF, the pseudo-continuous effect flag is ON, so if the variation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed.

Next, the sub CPU 320a determines the ready-to-win pattern based on the decorative design determination random number and the decorative design determination table TS2 when the acquired variation pattern corresponds to the effect of executing the ready-to-win (ready-to-win formation effect). . The sub CPU 320a skips this process when the acquired variation pattern does not correspond to the effect of executing the reach (reach formation effect).

Next, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect as described above based on the obtained variation pattern and the chance-up random number. Next, the sub CPU 320a determines the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped based on the acquired variation pattern and the decorative symbol determination random number.

As described above, the sub CPU 320a determines the basic display effect, the presence or absence of continuous effect execution, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous effect execution, the ready-to-win pattern, the presence or absence of chance-up execution, and the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped. Finally, a production pattern for realizing a display production, a character movable production, a sound production, and a light emission production is finally determined.

[Configuration of dimming/driving system 1500 and light emitting system 1550]
FIG. 15 shows a dimming/driving system 1500 for controlling the driving of various characters provided on the glass frame 150 of the game machine 100 and the game board unit 102 using a one-wire driver 1520 and for dimming the LEDs. , and a lighting system 1550 for controlling lighting of the LEDs of the indicator 125. FIG. A system composed of the effect control board 320, the lamp control board 340, the frame lighting device 345, the frame driving device 346, the board lighting device 347, and the board driving device 348 is called a dimming/driving system 1500. A system composed of the logic unit 1530 in the display 125, the one-wire driver 1520, and the LEDs of the display 125 is called a light emitting system 1550.

As shown in FIG. 15, the dimming/driving system 1500 drives various characters by a DATA signal and a CLOCK signal (hereinafter abbreviated as "CLK signal") output from the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320. It is a system that performs control and LED dimming control. The dimming/driving system 1500 includes a logic section 1530 in the performance control board 320, and inputs two signals, a DATA signal (DATA) and a CLK signal (CLK), in the lamp control board 340 to perform various functions. It has a two-wire driver 1510 that controls the operation of objects and a one-wire driver 1520 that inputs one signal generated from the DATA signal and the CLK signal to control the operation of various characters. A DATA signal and a CLK signal are output from the sub CPU 320a, and the two signals are input to the two-wire driver 1510 as they are (in a two-wire state), thereby being connected from the two-wire driver 1510. A signal is output to the frame lighting device 345 and the frame driving device 346 . The DATA signal and CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a are input to the logic unit 1530 and converted into one control signal. It is output to the board driving device 348 .

As shown in FIG. 15, the light emission system 1550 is a system that controls the light emission of the LEDs of the display 125 according to the DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300. FIG. Lighting system 1550 includes logic 1530 and one-wire driver 1520 in display 125 . A DATA signal and a CLK signal output from the main CPU 301 a are input to the logic unit 1530 and converted into one LED control signal, and the converted control signal is output to the one-wire driver 1520 .

The logic unit 1530 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the logic section 1530. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, the logic unit 1530 includes a first exclusive OR element 1601 (first XOR 1601), a buffer 1602, a resistor 1603, a capacitor 1604, a second exclusive OR element 1605 (second XOR 1605), a polarity inverting element 1606 and D-FlipFlop 1607.

The first XOR 1601 is an element that calculates an exclusive OR from the input DATA signal and CLK signal and outputs the result to the D terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607 . Buffer 1602, resistor 1603 and capacitor 1604 are used to delay the CLK signal by a predetermined amount of time. That is, by connecting a buffer 1602 and a resistor 1603 in series and connecting a capacitor 1604 between the output side of the resistor 1603 and GND, a first-order delay circuit 1608 is formed to delay the CLK signal. The delay time can be set by a time constant determined by the value of resistor 1603 and the capacity of capacitor 1604 . The branched CLK signal is directly input to one input terminal of the second XOR 1605 , and the CLK signal is input to the other input terminal via the primary delay circuit 1608 . The output of the second XOR 1605 is input to the CLK input terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607 via the polarity inverting element 1606 . In the D-FlipFlop 1607, the output signal of the first XOR 1601 is input to the D terminal, the output signal of the polarity inverting element 1606 is input to the CLK terminal, and the output signal from the Q terminal is output as a control signal.

Based on FIG. 17, the operation of logic unit 1530 will now be described. FIG. 17 is a timing chart of each signal in the logic section 1530. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17A shows the CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a and the main CPU 301a, and FIG. 17B shows the DATA signal output from the sub CPU 320a and the main CPU 301a.

When the CLK signal and the DATA signal are input to the first XOR 1601, the first XOR 1601 outputs the exclusive OR of the CLK signal and the DATA signal as shown in (c). That is, when the CLK signal and the DATA signal are in the same state (high and high or low and low), the output is low, and when the CLK signal and the DATA signal are in different states (one is high and the other is low), the output is low. , the output becomes High. (d) shows the CLK delay signal delayed in the first-order delay circuit 1608 . Furthermore, the CLK delay signal shown in (d) and the CLK signal (no delay signal shown in (a)) are input to the second XOR 1605, and the signal output from the second XOR 1605 (the CLK signal and the CLK delay signal are exclusive OR signal) is shown in (e). (f) shows a signal obtained by inverting the polarity of the output signal from the second XOR 1605 shown in (e) by the polarity inverting element 1606 . Then, the signal shown in (c) (output signal of the first XOR 1601) and the signal shown in (f) (output signal of the polarity inverting element 1606) are input to the D terminal and CLK terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607, respectively. The signal is shown in (g).

By using the first XOR 1601, the second XOR 1605, the primary delay circuit 1608, and the D-FlipFlop 1607 in this way, a delay occurs in the CLK signal and the DATA signal due to the difference in the length of the transmission line, noise, etc., and the CLK signal and the DATA signal A correct control signal can be generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal even if synchronization between the CLK signal and the DATA signal is lost.

[Description of 1-wire driver 1520]
Details of the one-wire driver 1520 used in the dimming/driving system 1500 and lighting system 1550 will now be described.

(Terminal arrangement diagram)
Based on FIG. 18, the appearance and terminal arrangement of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. 18A and 18B are diagrams showing an external view, terminal arrangement, and terminal symbols as viewed from above when the one-wire driver 1520 is implemented as an integrated circuit (hereinafter also referred to as an IC chip). As shown in FIG. 18, the one-wire driver 1520 is formed by molding an IC chip into a substantially square shape with resin or ceramic when viewed from the top, and is a QFN (Quad Flat Chip) having electrode pads arranged on the four sides of the bottom surface. Non-leaded package) type.

The function of each terminal of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a table for explaining the function of each terminal in the one-wire driver 1520 in association with each terminal symbol. As shown in FIG. 19, /OUTR0 to /OUTB2 indicated by terminal numbers 1 to 6 and 22 to 24 are of open drain type. NC (NO-CONNECTION) terminals with terminal numbers 18 and 20 are connected to GND or Vcc. Furthermore, when using an internal power supply, the VLOUT terminal and the Vcc terminal are directly connected, and when supplying power to Vcc from an external power supply, the VLOUT terminal is connected to the GND terminal.

(Function configuration)
Based on FIG. 20, the internal functional configuration of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the one-wire driver 1520 includes an address setting unit 2001, a logic processing unit 2002, an oscillator 2003, a buffer 2004, nine PWM (pulse width modulators) 2005, nine constant current drivers 2006 and A constant voltage regulator 2007 is provided.

The address setting unit 2001 performs setting (address setting) to the effect that the one-wire driver 1520 has been selected by the sub CPU 320a or the main CPU 301a by the input signals ID0, ID1, and ID2. When the one-wire driver 1520 is selected by the address setting unit 2001 , the logic processing unit 2002 converts the LED control signal from DATA-IN and outputs the control signal to each PWM 2005 . Oscillator 2003 is an oscillator that supplies a signal of a predetermined frequency to logic processing unit 2002 as a source of a control signal for PWM 2005 generated by logic processing unit 2002 . A buffer 2004 is a buffer for outputting the DATA-IN signal as the DATA-OUT signal. PWM 2005 pulse-width modulates the control signal from logic processing unit 2002 and outputs it to constant current driver 2006 . A constant current driver 2006 inputs a pulse signal from the PWM 2005 and controls light emission or extinguishing of the LED 2008 . A constant voltage regulator 2007 outputs a constant voltage of 5 V from the power supply as a power supply for the LED 2008 .

(Data setting method)
The 1-wire driver 1520 is a driver that performs dimming control of the LED and operation control of the movable accessory based on a data signal (DATA signal) transmitted through 1-wire. For reference, FIG. 21 shows a comparison with a conventional two-wire driver that synchronizes two signals, a clock signal and a data signal, to control LED dimming and to control the operation of movable objects.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the 1-wire driver 1520, each data state is assigned to a state transition (H→L, L→H) for a conventional 2-wire data signal. The data setting of the one-wire driver 1520 is set to either "basic mode" or "special mode" in the following "data setting format".

(data setting format)
A data setting format will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the data setting format of each command input to the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. The data setting of each command input to DATA-IN is set according to the format shown in FIG. 22(a). Specifically, they are "start command", "slave address", "sub address", "data byte" and "period command".

As for the start command, the command frequency indicating the 1-bit data width is recognized by taking in the start command indicating the start condition of the data input shown below.
〇Start command: 1010101010101010=0xAAA (original binary value: 11111111: see FIG. 22(b))
The 1-wire driver 1520 continues to recognize the cycle of the signal recognized by the start command until the period command (a command indicating the end of data) shown below. The pulse width within 1 bit must be input within 50% duty so as not to collapse.
○ Period command: 1001100110011001=0x9556 (original binary value: 10000001: see FIG. 22(c))
Also, when data is input continuously, it is necessary to set an interval cycle of 10 μS or more (“L input” in FIG. 22(a)) after the end of period command input until the next start command input.

(input mode)
The input mode will be described based on FIG. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing data contents set in the basic input mode. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the basic input mode, data consists of a start command, slave address, sub-address, data bytes, and period command in this order. Data of this configuration are received at intervals of 10 μs. The slave address is the ID setting of the one-wire driver 1520, the sub-address is the output channel setting, and the data byte is the data for PWM setting.

(special input mode)
23(b) and 23(c) are diagrams showing data contents set in the special input mode. The special input mode is an input mode used when setting all outputs individually.
(1) Individual setting of all outputs As shown in FIG. 23(b), lighting data of all outputs can be set by setting the following special mode data in the subaddress.
o Special mode setting data: 01101001010101 = 0x9955 (original binary value: 01100000)
In this case, it is necessary to input data for 9 channels, and if more than 9 channels are input, the 10th and subsequent channels are invalid.
(2) When setting the output channel As shown in FIG. 23(c), when the channel is set in the subaddress, the lighting data of the set channel can be set.

(data setting)
(1) Slave Address The setting of the slave will be described with reference to FIGS. 24-1 and 24-2. The potentials and logics input to the terminals ID0, ID1, and ID2 are defined as shown in FIGS. 24-1 and 24-2. However, the upper bit is set to "0", and the lower bit is set to "0" except for all selection. Also, Vcc="1010"=0xA, open="1001"=0x9, Rext-R/G/B(*)="0110"=0x6, and GND="0101"=0x5.

(2) Subaddress The setting of the subaddress will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub-address, output channel setting/all channel setting/special mode setting can be set. FIG. 25 shows "channel setting command", "original binary value" and channel setting in subaddress setting. The output channel setting sets the channel that defines the PWM setting, and the all channel setting sets the same PWM for all channels. In addition, the special mode is a mode in which all channels are individually set.

(3) Data byte (PWM setting)
The data byte setting will be described with reference to FIG. The data byte sets PWM dimming. PWM dimming is a control method for controlling (dimming) the intensity of light emitted from an LED based on the magnitude of the pulse width output to the LED. FIG. 26 shows the "Set PWM Command", "Original Binary Value" and PWM dimming values in data bytes. PWM dimming is shown as a ratio when the value at full output is 127.

(4) Notes on data setting Notes on data setting of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. The one-wire driver 1520 is designed to identify/process data with only data signals (asynchronous input signals). Therefore, the data period (communication speed) is read and learned by the start command (data input start condition). Then, the data is identified based on the learned cycle, and the learned cycle is reset by a period command (data input end condition). Therefore, for example, if the cycle from the start command to the period command is disrupted due to periodicity disturbance caused by the sub CPU 320a that occurs when noise is applied or the output processing of the C lamp PU 150a is delayed, the data is recognized. do not. Specifically, it is shown in (a) and (b) below.

(a) Data Cycle Learning FIG. 27A shows specifications for data cycle learning. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the interval between data should be 10 μS or more. In the first start command (indicated by "A" in FIG. 27(a)), the cycle/phase of data is learned during the period of the start command. In subsequent slave address, special mode setting, and lighting data setting (indicated by "B" in FIG. 27(a)), data is recognized based on the period/phase learned by the start command. The last period command (indicated by "C" in FIG. 27(a)) resets the learned period/phase. Also, between the start command and the period command (indicated by "D" in FIG. 27(a)), waveform disturbance when noise is applied, periodic disturbance caused by the sub CPU 320a, etc. If the period/phase of the data changes, the data cannot be recognized for some reason, so care must be taken not to change the period/phase.

(b) Data Recognition FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(b), the duty ratio of the High/Low pulse width must be within ±10%. Data cannot be correctly recognized unless it falls within this range (provided that the modulation period is 100%). In other words, the data is not recognized as data unless the polarity of the data is inverted when the duty ratio is ±10% or more.

(Example of input of control data)
An example of control data input will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. FIG.
(1) Example of basic data input to the same ID (a) When data A is input before the rising edge of internal PWM clock 127 (pattern 1)
FIG. 28(a) shows how the signal changes in this case. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the case of pattern 1, the output of data A starts at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0. As shown in FIG. In this case, the period from the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 to the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after is an input invalid period in which the input is invalid.

(b) When data A is input after the rising edge of internal PWM clock 127 (pattern 2)
FIG. 28(b) shows how the signal changes in this case. As shown in FIG. 28(b), in the case of this pattern 2, the output of data A does not start at the 0 rising edge of the internal PWM clock immediately after the data A is input, and the next internal PWM clock 0 rises. Output of data A is started at the edge. In this case, the period from the period input of data A to the rising edge of the next internal PWM clock 0 is an input invalid period.

(c) When data B is input after pattern 1 is output (pattern 3)
FIG. 28(c) shows how the signal changes when data B is input after pattern 1 is output. As shown in FIG. 28(c), in the case of this pattern 3, the data A starts to be output at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after the data A is input. The output of data B starts at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 (immediately after that). From the rising edge of internal PWM clock 127 immediately after data B is input to the rising edge of internal PWM clock 0 immediately after that, and from the rising edge of internal PWM clock 127 immediately after data B is input to the rising edge of internal clock 0 immediately after that. The period up to the edge is an input invalid period.

(d) When data B is input before the output of pattern 2 is started (pattern 4)
FIG. 29(a) shows how the signal changes when data B is input before the output of pattern 2 is started. In the case of this pattern 4, after the data A (period) is input, the input is invalid until the second rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0. Therefore, the data B is invalidated and the data A is output. .

(e) When the period command is missed (Pattern 5)
FIG. 29(b) shows how the signal changes when the period command misses. In the case of pattern 5, the output of data A does not start at the rising edge of internal PWM clock 0 immediately after data A is input, and the output of internal PWM clock 0 next (immediately after data B is input) does not start. Output of data B is started at the rising edge.

(2) Example of basic data input to another ID (a) When data B is input to slave = 02H immediately after data A is input to slave = 00H (pattern 6)
FIG. 30 shows how the signal changes when data B is input to slave=02H immediately after data A is input to slave=00H. In the case of pattern 6, both data A and data B are output at the rising edge of internal PWM clock 0 immediately after data A and data B are input.

(3) When it does not work as set (a) Pattern 7
FIG. 31(a) shows changes in signals when the period command is missed or omitted after data A is input to the slave = 00H, and when the period command is missed or omitted after data B is input to the slave = 02H. . In the case of pattern 7, data A is output, but data B is not.
(b) Pattern 8
FIG. 31(b) shows the signal change when the start command is input after the data B of pattern 7 is input. In the case of pattern 8, data A is output, but data B is not.

(Power supply function)
The power setting of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. The one-wire driver 1520 is capable of two power supply settings shown in (1) and (2) below.
(1) In case of sharing with LED power supply FIG. 32(a) shows a circuit configuration in case of sharing the one-wire driver 1520 and LED power supply. As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the power supply is shared with the LED power supply, the power supply (7.0 to 28 V) is input to the VL terminal, and the VLOUT and Vcc terminals are directly connected. The VLOUT terminal output (5 V) can be connected to only one logic IC (cannot be connected to a plurality of logic ICs or other drivers) other than connecting to Vcc.
(2) Direct Input of 5V to Vcc Terminal FIG. As shown in FIG. 32(b), when 5 V is directly applied to the one-wire driver 1520 without using the internal power supply, the VL and VOUT terminals are connected to GND.

When connecting the power supply according to the above (1) and (2), decoupling capacitors are added between the VL and Vcc terminals and GND. Performance values recommended for decoupling capacitors are as follows.
・Between VL (LED power supply) terminal and GND: 1μF electrolytic capacitor ・Vcc (5V power supply) and GND can: 1μF electrolytic capacitor and 0.1μF ceramic capacitor In this case, it depends on the performance of the main power supply, and in the case of the Vcc terminal and GND, it depends on the LED current to be set and the amount of supply current of VLOUT, so it may be changed accordingly.

(Cascade connection (data buffer function))
The case of cascading the one-wire drivers 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows a configuration in which a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 are cascaded. Since a buffer is built in between DATA-IN and DATA-OUT of the 1-wire driver 1520, it is possible to cascade a plurality of 1-wire drivers 1520 as shown in FIG. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, when cascading, it is necessary to have 5 or less within the same substrate.

(power-on reset operation)
The power-on reset (hereinafter also referred to as POR: Power On Reset) function of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows the Vcc waveform of the one-wire driver 1520 at POR. The POR function is designed to prevent malfunction by resetting all internal data to default settings when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 34, the POR function is only activated when Vcc rises from 0V, and reset is complete when Vcc goes from 0V to 2V. The lower limit voltage (data holding lower limit voltage) for the one-wire driver 1520 to hold data is 1.8 V, and data is not held when Vcc falls below this voltage. Rebooting after POR requires Vcc=0V. In addition, retention of internal data is guaranteed only after the Vcc voltage reaches 4.5 V or higher once.

(Thermal shutdown function)
Next, the thermal shutdown function of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. When the internal temperature of the one-wire driver 1520 reaches the thermal shutdown operating temperature shown in (1) below, the thermal shutdown circuit operates to turn off all the constant current power supplies. When the internal temperature drops and reaches the thermal shutdown cancellation temperature shown in (2) below, the constant current output operation is restarted.
(1) Thermal shutdown operating temperature: 150-180°C
(2) Thermal shutdown release temperature: -20°C from thermal shutdown activation temperature

(Other precautions)
(1) LED drive current setting external resistors (Rext-R, Rext-G, Rext-B) Next, the LED drive current setting external resistors will be described. The external resistors connected to the Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B terminals of the one-wire driver 1520 must be connected separately. If the three external resistors connected to each terminal of Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B are shared (that is, made into one resistor), each of Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B This configuration should be avoided as it introduces current errors.
(2) ID setting operation sequence The ID setting sequence of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 shows changes in Vcc during the ID setting operation. As shown in FIG. 35, when the power is turned on, the ID can be set while Vcc exceeds 4.5V and falls below 4.5V (time indicated by "A" in FIG. 35). In addition, the ID cannot be set during other times (sections indicated by "B" in FIG. 35). However, in order to prevent erroneous operation during ID setting, a transient input signal of less than two clock periods of external input data ((DATA-IN) is not accepted.
(3) Data setting In the special mode, it is necessary to input 9 channels of data for the gradation signal. If more than 9 channels are input, the 10th and subsequent channels are invalid. If the number of channels is less than 9, the data is updated up to the data-inputted channels, and the previous data is retained for the uninputted channels.
(4) Data setting timing When inputting data to the same slave address, data input may not be accepted unless there is an interval of 3ms (128 internal PWM clocks) or longer. to enter the following data: When data is input to another slave address, an interval of 3 mS (128 internal PWM clocks) or more is unnecessary.
(5) Decoupling Capacitor It is desirable to add a capacitor close to the power input terminal of the one-wire driver 1520 for power system stabilization.

(state change)
State transitions when the one-wire driver 1520 operates will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing state transitions when the VL terminal is used when the one-wire driver 1520 is operating, and FIG. 37 is a state transition when the one-wire driver 1520 is not using the VL terminal. It is a flow chart showing.

(1) When using the VL terminal In this case, the VLOUT terminal and the Vcc terminal are connected in advance, and the individual IDs (ID0 to ID2 terminals) of the one-wire driver 1520 are set in advance.
As shown in FIG. 36, when the main power is turned on (S3600), the VLOUT terminal supplies the operating voltage (S3605). Then, when the VLOUT terminal voltage becomes 4.5 V or higher (S3610), the ID is recognized (S3615). Here, data input is performed after 15 mS (minimum) elapses after Vcc voltage≧4.5 V or more. When the ID is recognized, the normal mode is entered (S3620), so the data of each output is updated for each ID set by the DATA signal, and the LED is dimmed. When the temperature of the one-wire driver 1520 becomes equal to or higher than the thermal shutdown detection temperature during LED dimming control, the thermal shutdown mode is entered (S3625), and all LED outputs are forcibly turned off. At this time, the internal data of the one-wire driver 1520 is held. When the temperature becomes equal to or lower than the thermal shutdown detection temperature, the normal mode (S3620) is resumed, and the dimming control of the LED is resumed.
(2) When the VL terminal is not used In this case, the VLOUT terminal and the VL terminal are connected to GND in advance, and the individual IDs (ID0 to 2) of the one-wire drivers 1520 are set.
As shown in FIG. 37, when the operating power is turned on (S3700), the Vcc terminal voltage becomes 4.5V or higher (S3705). The subsequent steps (S3710 to S3720) are the same state transitions as when the VL terminal shown in FIG. 36 is used.

(absolute maximum rating)
The absolute maximum ratings of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the absolute maximum ratings of the one-wire driver 1520 at an ambient temperature (Ta) of 25°C. In FIG. 38, the maximum value of input voltage VIN must not exceed 6.0V. Allowable loss Pd and saturated thermal resistance Rth(ja) are values when mounted on a board. The substrate conditions are 76.2 mm×114.3 mm×1.6 mm, Cu=30%, 35 μm thickness, SEMI compliant, 2-Layer. The permissible loss Pd is a value obtained by subtracting the reciprocal of the saturated thermal resistance value (1/Rth(ja)) every time the ambient temperature Ta exceeds 25°C by 1°C. The output current IOUT may be further limited by the ambient temperature Ta and substrate conditions. It is necessary to set the maximum value of the maximum junction temperature Tj to approximately 120° C. in consideration of the usage loss.

(package power dissipation)
Based on FIG. 39, the allowable loss characteristic of the package of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. FIG. 39 shows the package allowable loss characteristic of the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 39, the vertical axis (Y-axis) is the allowable loss Pd [W], and the horizontal axis (X-axis) is the operating temperature range Topr [°C]. As shown in FIG. 39, when the operating temperature range Topr is 0 [° C.] to 25 [° C.], the maximum allowable power dissipation is 2.4 [W], and when the operating temperature range Topr is 25 [° C.] to 85 [° C.] , the maximum allowable loss decreases according to a linear function represented by Y=-0.0192Y+2.88, and 85[°C] is the maximum operating temperature.

(Operating conditions)
Based on FIG. 40, operating conditions of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. FIG. 40 shows operating conditions for the one-wire driver 1520 . The one-wire driver 1520 operates under the operating conditions shown in FIG. 40 at an ambient temperature Ta=-40 to 85.degree.

(Electrical characteristics)
Electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a table for explaining the electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520, and FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. The one-wire driver 1520 has electrical characteristics shown in FIG. 42 under the conditions of ambient temperature Ta=25° C., LED power supply VL=15V, and operating power supply Vcc=VLOUT. Also, FIG. 41 shows the definition of each symbol in DATA-IN and DATA-OUT.

[Features of dimming/driving system 1500 and lighting system 1550]
In the dimming/driving system 1500 of the above-described embodiment, the logic section 1530 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal, and the one-wire driver 1520 generates one control signal generated by the logic section 1530. Based on this, the board lighting device 347 and the board driving device 348 can be operated. That is, in the dimming/driving system 1500, the one-wire driver 1520 can dim the LEDs (lamps) of a plurality of movable accessories provided in the game board unit 120, which is the board lighting device 347. , a two-wire driver 1510 can control the light of a plurality of decorative LEDs (decorative lamps) provided on the glass frame 150 which is the frame illumination device 345 . In addition, the one-wire driver 1520 can drive and control a plurality of movable accessories provided in the game board unit 120, which is the board drive device 348, and the two-wire driver 1510 can drive the frame drive device 346. It is possible to drive and control a plurality of accessories provided on the glass frame 150.

In other words, the one-wire driver 1520 adjusts the LEDs of the game board unit 120 and controls the movable accessories, and the two-wire driver 1510 adjusts the LEDs of the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160 and the inner frame 170. Lighting and control of movable accessories, in other words, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100 . By mixing the 1-wire driver 1520 and the 2-wire driver 1510 in this way, for example, in a game machine in which the game board unit and the glass frame 150 both use the 2-wire driver 1510, , the new board unit using the one-wire driver 1520 can replace the conventional board unit (using the two-wire driver 1510). Also, in this case, the game board unit can be replaced without changing the software being executed by the sub CPU 320a. Furthermore, by using the dimming/driving system 1500, it is possible to reduce the number of components in the transmission path of the control signal, reduce the space required for the transmission path, and install parts that were difficult to install in the past. Since it is possible to reduce the number of parts by doing so, the possibility of failure is reduced, leading to a reduction in the interruption time of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the lighting system 1550 of the above-described embodiment, the logic section 1530 of the display 125 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal, and the one-wire driver 1520 generates one control signal generated by the logic section 1530. The light emission control of the indicator LED can be performed based on. By using such a light emitting system 1550, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100, similar to the dimming/driving system 1500 described above. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the transmission path of the control signal, and to reduce the number of parts by reducing the space required for the transmission path and installing parts that were difficult to install in the past. It is possible.

In the logic unit 1530 in the above-described embodiment, the first XOR 1601 generates the signal (c) by exclusive ORing the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and the first-order delay circuit 1608 generates the CLK delay signal (d ) and the CLK signal (a), the signal (e) is generated by the exclusive OR in the second XOR 1605, and the signal (c) generated in the first XOR 1601 and the signal (e) generated in the second XOR 1605 are combined. A control signal (g) can be generated in the D-FlipFlop 1607 from . In the dimming/driving system 1500 and the light emitting system 1550 using such a logic unit 1530, the CLK signal and the DATA signal are delayed due to the difference in the length of the transmission line and noise. Even if the synchronization between the and is lost, a correct LED control signal can be generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and various controls can be appropriately performed.

(Second embodiment)
FIG. 43 shows the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4300 of the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, except for the configuration of the effect control board 4320 and the lamp control board 4340, since it is the same as the dimming/driving system 1500 of the first embodiment, the same members are given the same reference numerals. explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 43 , the dimming/driving system 4300 includes a lamp CPU 4350 that performs arithmetic processing on a lamp control board 4340 and a logic section 1530 . The lamp CPU 4350 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp drive control program stored in the ROM provided on the lamp control board 4340, and utilizes the RAM provided on the lamp control board 4340 as a work area. It performs arithmetic processing related to production. In addition, the lamp CPU 4350 is connected to the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 4320, and according to the effect instruction command received from the sub CPU 320a, the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices perform predetermined effects. Outputs data and commands for In other words, the dimming/driving system 4300 is a system that controls the driving of various characters and the dimming control of LEDs using DATA and CLK signals output from the lamp CPU 4350 in response to commands output from the sub CPU 320a. .

Thus, in the dimming/driving system 4300 of the second embodiment, the lamp control board 4340 is provided with the lamp CPU 4350, the logic section 1530, the two-wire driver 1510, and the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. Therefore, with such a dimming/driving system 4300, although the lamp control board is replaced with a lamp control board 4340 having a configuration different from that of the conventional one, the conventional performance control board and the like can be used as they are. The one-wire driver 1520 enables drive control of various accessories of the game board unit 102, dimming of LEDs, and the like.

(Third embodiment)
A dimming/driving system 4400 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4400 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. Since the third embodiment is the same as the dimming/driving system 4300 of the second embodiment except for the configuration of the lamp control board 4440, the same members are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 44, in the dimming/driving system 4400 of the third embodiment, the function of the logic section 1530, that is, the exclusion of DATA and CLK, is different from the dimming/driving system 4300 (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment. A logical OR is generated by software processing executed inside the lamp CPU 4450, and the result is output as a control signal from a DATA terminal (a DATA terminal different from the DATA terminal in the first embodiment). That is, the logic part 1530 is omitted and the function is assigned to the lamp CPU 4450 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, lamp CPU 4450 inputs CLK in S4500 and then inputs DATA in S4505. In S4510, the exclusive OR of CLK and DATA input in S4500 and S4505 is calculated, and in S4515, the exclusive OR of CLK and DATA calculated in S4510 is output to the DATA terminal as a control signal. After outputting the control signal to the DATA terminal, the process returns to S4500 to continue the process.

Thus, in the dimming/driving system 4400 of the third embodiment, the exclusive OR of DATA and CLK is performed by software processing inside the lamp CPU 4450, thereby eliminating the need for the logic section 1530. FIG. Therefore, in the dimming/driving system 4400 of the third embodiment, for example, if there is an unused terminal among the plurality of DATA terminals of the lamp CPU 4450, wiring to that DATA terminal is sufficient. The one-wire driver 1520 enables drive control of various accessories of the game board unit 102, dimming of LEDs, and the like.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment will be described based on FIG. FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a dimming/driving system 4600 in which a plurality of 1-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of 2-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection). In the fourth embodiment, the dimming/driving system 1500 of the first embodiment and the dimming of the second embodiment are used, except that a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of two-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages. Since the configuration is the same as that of the /drive system 4300, the same members are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the dimming/driving system 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the one-wire drivers 1520a to 1520d receive the LED control signal output by the logic unit 1530, and output the input LED control as it is. The two-wire drivers 1510a to 1510d receive the DATA signal and the CLK signal output by the sub CPU 320a and output the input DATA signal and the CLK signal as they are. In the dimming/driving system 4600, the DATA signal and CLK signal output by the sub CPU 320a are input to the two-wire driver 1510a, and the DATA signal and CLK signal are output from the two-wire driver 1510b. Input to driver 1510b. Furthermore, the two-wire drivers 1510a to 2-wire drivers 1510c and 1510d are sequentially connected in multiple stages. Also, the DATA signal and CLK signal output by the sub CPU 320a are input to the logic unit 1530, where they are converted into LED control signals, which are serial signals, and output to the one-wire driver 1520a. Further, the LED control signal output from the one-wire driver 1520a is input to the one-wire driver 1520b, and the LED control signal output from the one-wire driver 1530b is sequentially connected to the one-wire drivers 1520c and 1520d in multiple stages.

According to the gaming machine equipped with the dimming/driving system 4600 of the fourth embodiment, the role controlled by the predetermined signal, the first signal (DATA signal) for operating the role, and the first 2 signals (CLK signal) to generate a third signal (LED control signal), control means capable of transmitting the third signal, receiving the third signal from the control means, and actuating means for actuating the accessory based on the above, wherein the actuating means receives the third signal and is configured to be capable of outputting the third signal to other actuating means connected at a later stage. and the control means can be configured to be capable of transmitting the third signal to the operating means connected in multiple stages. With such a gaming machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, even if a plurality of 1-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of 2-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection), the above-described first to third embodiments are possible. A similar effect can be obtained as in the dimming/driving system in

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment will be described based on FIG. In the fifth embodiment, dimming/driving systems 1500, 4300, 4400 are applied to the game board unit 102. FIG. FIG. 47 is an external view showing a schematic arrangement of decoration units around the game area.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the game board unit 102 according to the fifth embodiment, a right peripheral lens portion 4721a that covers the outer periphery of the right side above the lower side of the game area 4701 and a left peripheral lens portion 4740a that covers the outer periphery of the left side. By appropriately emitting light from LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4744a, and 4746a corresponding to each of them, a plurality of light emitting decorations can be provided substantially concentrically so as to surround the game area 4701 . In addition, in the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4723b and 4746b corresponding to the right emission lens portion 4721b covering the outer circumference of the right side and the left emission lens portion 4740b covering the outer circumference of the left side respectively are arranged in the right circumference lens portion 4721a and the left circumference lens portion 4740a. are arranged so as to extend radially around the center lower part in the left-right direction of the game area 4701 so as to divide the game area 4701 in the circumferential direction. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 4723b and 4746b of the left and right radiation lens portions 4721b and 4740b, the outer side of the game area 4701 can be decorated with radial light emission. The luminous decoration can be divided in the circumferential direction.

Furthermore, in the glass frame 150, LEDs 4756a corresponding to the center lens 4752 decorating the upper center of the game area 4701 decorate the upper center of the game area 4701 with light emission. By appropriately emitting light from this LED 4756a, the center of the upper part of the game area 4701 can be decorated with light emission, and in addition, the light emission decoration that becomes the reference point of the annular light emission decoration by the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a. It is designed to allow In addition, the LEDs 4756b arranged on both sides of the central lens 4752 decorate both left and right sides of the central lens 4752 with light. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 4756b, the boundary between the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a and the central lens 4752 is decorated with light emission, and the upper side (including the upper part) of the game area 4701 is decorated with light emission in a V shape. It is designed to be able to

In the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4764a and 4765a corresponding to the light guide portions 4763a of the upper plate front decorative member (not shown) in the plate unit 4760 decorating the lower side of the game area 4701 are connected to the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left side. The outer periphery of the lower side of the game area 4701 is decorated with light so as to connect the lower ends of the peripheral lens portions 74740a. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 4764a and 4765a, the lower side of the game area 4701 and the front edge of the upper tray can be decorated with light. By interlocking with 4746a, the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701 can be ring-shaped with light emitting decoration. In addition, in the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4773b and 4774d corresponding to the dial operation portion 4771 and the pressing operation portion 4772 of the operation unit 4770 arranged in the center of the lower side of the game area 4701 and the center of the upper portion of the plate unit 4760 turn the operation unit 4770 on. Decorate with luminescence. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 4773b and 4774d, the dial operation portion 4771 and the pressing operation portion 4772 can be illuminated and decorated, and the player can be notified of the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation portion 4771 and the pressing operation portion 4772. is now possible.

By the way, in the glass frame 150, as described above, the LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4744a, 4746a, 4756a, 4765a, 4765a, and 4774d are full-color LEDs. I have. Also, the LEDs 4756b and 4773b are white LEDs with high brightness and require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness, so two systems are connected to each of them. The LEDs 4723b and 4746b are white LEDs with normal brightness.

According to such a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, it has a game area in which game balls flow down and a plurality of first light emitters, and a plurality of light emitters are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area, depending on the game state. a first light-emitting part capable of emitting light; and a second light-emitting part having a plurality of second light-emitting bodies, arranged in plurality along the outer periphery of the game area, and capable of emitting light according to the game state; One light-emitting part is configured such that a large number of the plurality of first light-emitting bodies are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area, and the second light-emitting part comprises the plurality of second light-emitting bodies. Among them, it is possible to configure so that a large number of them are arranged in a substantially radial direction with respect to the outer periphery of the game area. That is, in the light emission control in the glass frame 150, the lighting, blinking, etc. of each of the LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4723b, 4744a, 4746a, 4746b, 4756a, 4756b, 4765a, 4765a, 4773b, 4774d are controlled by dynamic lighting. , and gradation (color and brightness) are controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). With such a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, it is possible to perform an expressive lighting effect.

In addition, as the light emission effect in the glass frame 150, for example, the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a are sequentially illuminated (successively emit light in the same color or similar color) so as to rotate around the game area 4701. The game area 4701 is expanded from the inside to the outside by causing the right radiation lens part 4721b and the left radiation lens part 4740b to emit light from the inside to the outside (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted), or By emitting light in the reverse order, the light emission effect converges from the outside to the inside, or the right peripheral lens part 4721a and the left peripheral lens part 4740a and the right radiation lens part 4721b and the left radiation lens part 4740b are caused to emit light at the same time. With , it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like in which the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701 is illuminated widely.

Further, in the right peripheral lens portion 4721a, the left peripheral lens portion 4740a, the right radiation lens portion 4721b, the left radiation lens portion 4740b, and the light guide portion 4763a of the top plate front decoration member (not shown), LEDs 4722a, 4744a, 4723a, By making 4746b, 4764a, and 4765a emit light as appropriate, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer circumference of the game area 4701, or move the light along the outer circumference of the game area 4701 toward the central lens 4752. Alternatively, it is possible to perform a lighting effect such that light from the central lens 4752 moves along the outer periphery of the game area 4701 .

Then, by causing only the right radiation lens portion 4721b and the left radiation lens portion 4740b to emit light, a light emission effect that emits light radially around the game area 4701 can be performed, or the right radiation lens portion 4721b and the left radiation lens portion 4740b can be emitted simultaneously. By causing the lens portion 4721a, the left peripheral lens portion 4740a, and the light guide portion 4763a of the top plate front decorative member (not shown) to emit light, the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701 emits light substantially uniformly. By causing the right radiation lens part 4721b and the left radiation lens part 4740b to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the peripheral lens part 4721a and the left peripheral lens part 4740a emit light, a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the annular light emitting decoration is performed. can be Further, by individually causing the right radiation lens portion 4721b, the left radiation lens portion 4740b, and the LEDs 4723b and 4746b to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which the radiation lens portions 4721b and 4740b rotate.

In addition, by causing the LEDs 4756a and 4756b of the central lens 4752 to emit light at the same time, the entire central lens 4752 emits light. It can be carried out. In addition, the center lens 4752 is decorated with high brightness to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a variable probability game state, a short time game state, a short time probability game state, etc.) It is possible to perform a light emission effect.

Furthermore, the LEDs 4764a and 4765a of the light guide portion 4763a of the top plate front decoration member (not shown) are appropriately illuminated to perform light emission decoration of the front edge of the top plate, or the dial operation portion of the operation unit 4770. By making LEDs 4773b and 4774d associated with 4771 and pressing operation portion 4772 emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect for prompting the operation of dial operation portion 4771 and pressing operation portion 4772. In addition, by appropriately lighting the LED 4773b corresponding to the dial operation portion 4771, it is possible to perform light emitting effects such as prompting the operation of the dial operation portion 4771 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation portion 4771. Furthermore, by causing the LED 4774d corresponding to the pressing operation portion 4772 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation portion 4772 .

(Sixth embodiment)
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the dimming/driving systems 1500, 4300, 4400 are applied to the game board unit 102. FIG.

The main RAM 301c is provided with a backup area 301cp in addition to a memory for temporarily storing various data. The backup area 301cp stores the value of the stack pointer and various data at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown due to operation of a power switch (not shown); the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch (not shown; the same shall apply hereinafter), the state of the game machine 100 will return to the state before the power shutdown based on the information in the backup area 301cp. It is now possible to return. Writing to the backup area 301cp is executed by power recovery processing when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 301cp is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

The power supply board 360 is provided with a backup capacitor 360a. Power is supplied from the power supply board 360 to the backup capacitor 360a, and when the gaming machine 100 is powered on, the backup capacitor 360a is charged. Also, the backup capacitor 360a is connected to the wiring 360b described above. Therefore, when the gaming machine 100 is powered off, the backup capacitor 360a is discharged, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 301c (backup area 301cp). Therefore, even if the gaming machine 100 is powered off, the data stored in the main RAM 301c (backup area 301cp) is retained without being erased while power is being supplied from the backup capacitor 360a. By the way, the capacity of the backup capacitor 360a is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 301c before power-off is retained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days).

Normally, power to the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 is supplied via a power supply board 360 to which power is supplied from an external power supply. Therefore, when the power switch is turned off or the external power source is shut off, power is no longer supplied to the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300. FIG. In this case, the main CPU 301a does not function, but the main RAM 301c is supplied with power from the backup capacitor 360a, and various data can be stored in the main RAM 301c. On the other hand, even if power is supplied from the backup capacitor 360a to the main RAM 301c when the external power supply is interrupted, the power supply to the main RAM 301c is interrupted when the wiring 360b is disconnected. Therefore, winning information and the like stored in the main RAM 301c are erased, and cheating cannot be performed.

According to the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, main control means for controlling a game, main storage means provided in the main control means for storing information necessary for controlling the game, and the main control means sub-control means for controlling the game based on information from; sub-storage means provided in the sub-control means for storing information necessary for controlling the game; connected to an external power supply; a main power supply that supplies power to the sub-control means through the main wiring and supplies power to the sub-control means through the sub-wiring; In addition to supplying power to the means, when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped and when power supply from the main power supply to the main control means via the main wiring is stopped, and a secondary power source that does not supply power to at least the main storage means. Further, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, the sub power supply supplies power to at least the sub storage means when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, and supplies power from the external power supply to the main power supply. When the power supply to the power supply is stopped and when the power supply from the main power supply to the sub control means via the sub wiring is stopped, at least the power supply to the sub storage means is not performed. You can also

[Description of the seventh embodiment]
A seventh embodiment, which is an example of embodiments of the present invention, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 to 64. FIG. First, the gaming machine 1 (pachinko machine) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57. FIG.

In the following description, one side of the game board unit 12 shown in FIG. 49 and the direction toward the inner side of the island installed in the game hall is the rear direction of the game machine 1 . The other side of the game board unit 12 and the direction toward the player is defined as the front direction of the game machine 1 . Also, the rightward, leftward, upward, and downward directions in the rear view of the game board unit 12 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes an outer frame 10, a game board unit 12, and an inner frame . The outer frame 10 is directly attached to an island installed in the game hall. The outer frame 10 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is longer in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12 and the inner frame 14 are rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 10 in the vicinity of one vertical side of the outer frame 10 .

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the game board unit 12 mainly includes a base frame 121, a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a rear cover 124. there is

The game board unit 12 is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10 by rotatably attaching the base frame 121 to the outer frame 10 . The game board unit 12 is configured by assembling a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a rear cover 124, and the like to a base frame 121. As shown in FIG.

Specifically, a game board 122 is attached to the front side of the base frame 121, and an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a rear cover 124, and the like are assembled to the rear side of the base frame 121. FIG.

An opening (not shown) is formed in the base frame 121 and the game board 122 so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) of the image display device 123 can be seen from the front when the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side. ing.

The game board 122 is formed with a game area in which game balls flow down. The game board 122 is attached to the base frame 121 so that the game area faces the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121. As shown in FIGS. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame 121 . Also, the lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121 . The rear cover 124 partially covers the rear surface of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

On the rear side of the game board unit 12, an assembly 2, which will be described later, is assembled. The assembly 2 is attached to the base frame 121 below the portion where the image display unit is covered with the back cover 124 .

As shown in FIG. 49, the inner frame 14 is formed with a fitting space 141 into which the glass plate is fitted. Therefore, when the game machine 1 is assembled, the game area set on the game board of the game board unit 12 can be seen from the front through the glass plate fitted in the fitting space 141 . Further, on the front side of the inner frame 14, an operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided.

The assembly 2 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the assembly 2 includes a pedestal 20, a substrate case 3, and a protective cover . The pedestal 20 is a component used to attach the board case 3 to the rear side of the game board unit 12 (see FIG. 51). As shown in FIG. 53, the pedestal 20 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the horizontal direction are longer than two sides along the vertical direction. , and a plate-like hook 22 is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 21 is aligned with the left-right direction.

The substrate case 3 is provided with a pair of hook portions 49 that are engaged with the respective shaft portions 21 . A pair of hook portions 49 are provided on the lower side of an outer case 45, which will be described later. The hook portion 49 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 6, when attaching the board case 3 to the pedestal 20, the board case 3 is arranged so that the hook portion 49 protrudes toward the rear side. As a result, the hooks 49 can be engaged with the shafts 21 , and the substrate case 3 is moved closer to the base 20 to engage the hooks 49 with the shafts 21 .

Then, when the hook portion 49 is engaged with the shaft portion 21, the substrate case 3 is rotated about the shaft portion 21 counterclockwise in left side view (in the direction of the arrow of symbol C in FIG. 6), and the substrate case 3 is rotated. are superimposed on the pedestal 20. As shown in FIG. 52 , at this time, the plate-shaped hook 22 provided on the upper side of the base 20 is hooked on the recess 3 a provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3 . Therefore, the substrate case 3 is fixed to the pedestal 20 by the engagement between the hook portion 49 and the shaft portion 21 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 22 and the substrate case 3 .

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the protective cover 23 is then attached to the board case 3 . The protective cover 23 covers the lower portion of the board case 3 including the hook portion 49 . The assembly 2 is assembled in this manner and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12 .

The control board 501 and the board case 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, a control board 501 for controlling games is housed in the board case 3 . A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501 . A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501 . The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Also, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the control board 501. FIG. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 55(b), and may be omitted in other drawings.

The ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) used for game control. In addition, the ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) that affect game results. A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of the control board 501 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower portion of the outer case 45 of the board case 3 .

A plurality of connectors 774 and 775 among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775, respectively. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 receive signals from at least some of the general winning opening detection switch, the first starting opening detecting switch, the second starting opening detecting switch, and the large winning opening detecting switch for detecting that the game ball has won. signal is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detecting switch, a second starting opening detecting switch, and a large winning opening detecting switch 1 for detecting that a game ball has won a prize. Assume that all signals are input. The detection signal connectors 774,775 are a different color than the other connectors 771,772,773,776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The ROM 502 includes a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582 . A first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501 . The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3 . Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the body portion 580 of the ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the control board 501 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the board case 3 .

A signal pin provided for each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is called a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 53). The second signal pin 583 transmits signals between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501 . A signal is not limited to a digital signal, and includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the substrate case 3 . Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected with the control board 501 . Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the board case 3 .

As shown in FIG. 53, the substrate case 3 is a box-shaped case that accommodates the control substrate 501 and the ROM 502 in such a manner that they can be visually recognized and are difficult to touch. Further, the board case 3 encloses the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 55(b)) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 3 is made of, for example, a member having light transmission properties such as transparent plastic.

The substrate case 3 includes a plurality of members 511 containing the control substrate 501 and a cutting member 6 for cutting the sealing seal 7 . The plurality of members 511 includes inner case 40 , outer case 45 and cap 8 . The inner case 40 is combined with the outer case 45 to form an inner package portion 581 that includes the control board 501 . The outer case 45 is provided on the rear side, which is the ROM 502 side, of the substrate case 3 . The inner case 40 is provided on the front side opposite to the ROM 502 side in the board case 3 . In FIG. 52(c), only the ROM 502 is shown among the electrical components provided on the control board 501 contained in the transparent board case 3, and other electrical components are omitted. (The same applies to FIG. 57(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 56, each of the cases 40 and 45 includes control board housing portions 41 and 46 for housing a control board 501 (see FIG. 53) and a sealing base portion 5 (see FIG. 57) which will be described later. Stop portions 51 and 56 are provided. The control board housing portions 41 and 46 are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 42 and 47 and the peripheral edge portions of the plate portions 42 and 47, respectively. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange portions 43 and 48 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the left portion of the plate portion 42 of the inner case 40 is provided with a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the control board 501 side. A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the control board 501 .

The control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40, the hole portion 567 of the control board 501 is arranged. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 55) is inserted from the rear side of the control board 501 into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 via the hole portion 567 . The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 55(b)). As a result, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 , and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40 . That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40 side.

As shown in FIG. 56, of the flange portion 43 of the control board housing portion 41, the portion protruding from the plate portion 42 along two long sides of the plate portion 42 (hereinafter referred to as "male portion") is are formed with three L-shaped hooking grooves 430, respectively.

On the other hand, of the flange portion 48 of the control board housing portion 46, the portion protruding from the plate portion 47 along two long sides of the plate portion 47 (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 480 into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 41 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 481 is formed in each insertion groove portion 480 .

When the inner case 40 to which the control board 501 is screwed with the screws 769 and the outer case 45 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 43 is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 48 . Then, the control board housing portions 41 and 46 are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 56 along the left-right direction. Then, the hooking groove 430 provided in the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 481, so that the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board storage sections 41 and 46 form a box-shaped inner envelope section 581 inside which is shielded from the outside. The control board 501 (see FIG. 53) is housed in the encapsulating portion 581 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced.

The control board 501 is attached inside the control board housing portion 46 before the control board housing portions 41 and 46 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate portion 47 of the control board housing portion 46 . This is because the plate portion 47 is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the control board 501 is accommodated in the board case 3, the electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 cannot be illegally replaced. This is because it is possible to check from the outside through the plate portion 47 whether there is any. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, when the assembly 2 including the board case 3 is attached to the game board unit 12, the control board 501 inside the board case 3 is connected to the control board 501 through the outer case 45 from the back side of the game machine 1. Mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 56, sealing portions 51 and 56 are provided at the right end portions of the cases 40 and 45, respectively. As shown in FIG. 57 , the cases 40 and 45 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 96 above the sealing portions 51 and 56 .

When the control board housing portions 41 and 46 are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 5 is formed by the sealing portions 51 and 56 at the ends in the longitudinal direction of the combined sealing body 4 .

As shown in FIG. 55 , when the cap 8 is attached to the sealing body 4 while covering the sealing base portion 5 , a first screwing piece 91 and a second screwing piece 91 are attached to the ends of the sealing body 4 in the longitudinal direction. In addition to the piece 96, a third screw-stopping piece 98 provided on the cap 8 overlaps to form a screw-stopping portion 9 for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 56 , the sealing portions 51 and 56 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 41 and 46 . The sealing portions 51 and 56 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction.

Long groove portions 512 and 562 are formed in the respective sealing portions 51 and 56 along the left-right direction. Two parallel grooves 562 are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 56 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 512 is formed in the sealing portion 51 in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the cases 40 and 45 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 51 and 56 form the sealing base portion 5 on the right side of the combined control board storage portions 41 and 46. do.

In the sealing base portion 5, the sealing portions 51 and 56 are arranged parallel to each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space 5a (see FIG. 57) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 51 and 56 facing each other. be.

As shown in FIG. 56, the sealing seal 7 is used as means for sealing the substrate case 3, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications.

The sealing seal 7 is made of an easily cut material such as paper, and has an adhesive surface on one side thereof, and has a plurality of cuts. Although not shown, the seal 7 is printed with, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark). Further, the seal 7 is also printed with the words "Do not open".

The cutting member 6 is formed in a shape having a base portion 60 , a pair of knob portions 61 and a cutting portion 64 . A base portion 60 serving as the base of the cutting member 6 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64 is formed on one of two long sides of the base portion 60 . The cutting portion 64 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 60 is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 61 are provided at both ends of the base portion 60 in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent in a "<" shape as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 61 is referred to as a free end portion 61a.

The cap 8 is formed to have a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 5 by covering the sealing base portion 5 , and is detachably formed with respect to the sealing base portion 5 .

The cap 8 includes a bowl-shaped box portion 80 covering the sealing base portion 5 and a third screw stop piece 98 formed at one longitudinal end of the box portion 80 . A protrusion 82 is formed on the inner surface of the box portion 80 at a position where the free end portion 61a of the knob portion 61 of the cutting member 6 inserted into the insertion/removal space 5a is caught when the cap 8 is attached to the sealing base portion 5. is provided. A groove portion 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box portion 80 .

The cutting member 6 is inserted into the insertion/removal space 5a of the sealing base portion 5 (see FIG. 57). After that, the sealing seal 7 is attached. Furthermore, when the cap 8 is put on the sealing base portion 5, the groove portion 86 fits into a portion of the cutting member 6 inserted into the insertion/removal space 5a. Also, the projection 82 engages with the free end portion 61a of the knob portion 61 of the cutting member 6. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55 , when the cap 8 is put on the sealing base 5 as described above, the third screw-stopping piece 98 engages the first screw-stopping piece 91 of the inner case 40 and the second screw-stopping piece 91 of the outer case 45 . The screw-stopping piece 96 is overlapped with the combination to constitute the screw-stopping portion 9 for screwing. When the crimping member 30 is driven into the screwing portion 9, the inner case 40, the outer case 45 and the cap 8 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the substrate case 3 , the caulking member 30 is removed and the cap 8 is removed from the sealing base portion 5 . The same applies when the board case 3 is illegally unsealed.

The cutting member 6 and the cap 8 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8 is removed from the sealing base 5, the cutting member 6 is also removed from the sealing base 5 at the same time. Then, the sealing seal 7 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64 or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification marks 520 are attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8. FIG. The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45 is referred to as identification display 523 , and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40 is referred to as identification display 524 . The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 8 is called an identification mark 525 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is attached to ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the substrate case 3 are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the inner case 40 by stamping with a die for manufacturing the inner case 40 (see FIG. 57). The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8 by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8 . The display mode of the identification display 523 and the relationship with the information identification section will be described later.

Identifying indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least identifying indicia 529 suggesting the same content. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". An identification 529 suggesting the same contents as the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.

In the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name is not displayed as "AB" included in "ABCD", but the manufacturer name itself is displayed like "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. You may Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed like "CR AIU" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. Further, the identification indications 521 to 525 may indicate the model, such as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the identification indications suggesting the same contents among the identification indications 521 to 525 are the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

In the following description, the surface of the outer case 45 that forms the inside of the substrate case 3 is referred to as an inner surface 532 . A surface of the outer case 45 that forms the outside of the substrate case 3 is called an outer surface 531 . As shown in FIGS. 52(c), 55(c), and 57, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display portion 541. As shown in FIGS. The position display portion 541 is a portion that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is provided. The position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the board case 3 . More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the outer case 45 . The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmissive material is attached to the position display portion 541. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example. A printed portion 797 is printed on the seal portion 542 . In this embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523 . Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542 , the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 . The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3 . In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the substrate case 3 when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 55(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually other electronic components (see FIG. 53) are also present. The identification display 523 of the outer case 45 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 . As with the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 64) in the modified example to be described later, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the ROM 502 when the substrate case 3 is at a predetermined angle.

In this way, when a sticker or the like with an identification mark attached by printing or the like is affixed to an object so that the identification mark is attached to the object, the seal portion or the like including the identification mark is called an information identification portion. It is assumed that In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523 is the information identification portion. Note that the identification marks 520 are attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8, but one is not attached to each, and two or more are attached. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may have two identification marks, and similarly may have two information identification portions.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a substrate case 3 that encloses the control substrate 501 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 52, 53, 55, and 57, the substrate case 3 is provided with a position display portion 541, which is a portion for displaying the position where the identification display 523 is provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, when the game machine 1 is manufactured, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is given at different positions among the plurality of game machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

A position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541 which is a concave portion is provided, the inspector can grasp the position of the position display portion 541, for example, compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3 by printing or the like. easy to do Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the substrate case 3 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the concave position mark portion 541 . Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the board case 3 . In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the ROM 502 has been replaced by an illegal act. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display portion 541 which is a concave portion is provided, it is possible to prevent peeling of the seal when the seal portion 542 is affixed to the flat surface of the substrate case 3 when, for example, it is touched by a hand. can. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion 541 , the seal portion is protected, so the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523, which is the information identification portion attached to the substrate case 3, and the identification display 522, which is the information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, are identification indications suggesting at least the same content. 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 . Since the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized, the inspector can distinguish the ROM 502 with the same identification mark 529 attached and the circuit board case 3 . You can easily check and confirm that no fraudulent activity is taking place. Further, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent act, for example, by determining whether the ROM 502 and the identification mark 529 attached to the board case 3 are the same, the inspector can It is easy to confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, a seal portion 542 including an identification display 523 attached to the substrate case 3, an identification display 522 attached to the ROM 502, and an information identification displayed on the control substrate 501. The identification indication 521, which is the part, includes at least an identification indication 529 (character string "ABCD" in this embodiment) suggesting the same content. Therefore, the inspector can easily check that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3 with the identification marks 529 suggesting the same content are attached, and that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Further, even if at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and the ROM 502 by fraud, the identification marks 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3 are the same. By judging whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The board case 3 encloses the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776, for example. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Moreover, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 for fraud. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 than when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 for fraud. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A first signal pin 582 provided in the ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3 . Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582 tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3 . Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the control board 501 is connected to the second signal pin 583 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40 side with screws 769 (see FIG. 55(b)). Therefore, the control board 501 is less likely to be illegally replaced than when it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 are slidably combined with each other. Therefore, even if a person who tries to commit fraud simply tries to separate the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 in order to separate the outer case 45 and the inner case 40, the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 are separated. hard to be Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the control board 501 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible. In each modified example below, the same reference numerals are used to denote the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion. FIG. 58 shows a cross-section of the outer case 45 of the board case 1003 according to the modified example of the board case 3 taken along line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45 and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 .

Further, although the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position indicator 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 . FIG. 59 shows a cross-section of the outer case 45 of the board case 1103 according to the modification of the board case 3, taken along line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, the position display portion 541 of the substrate case 1103 is a concave portion formed in the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 1103 and recessed rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1103 through the transparent outer case 45 .

FIG. 60 shows a cross-section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1203 is a protrusion formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1203 and protrudes forward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1203 through the transparent outer case 45 .

As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 and is a projection or recess for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541, which is a convex portion or a concave portion, is provided, the inspector can easily locate the position of the identification display 520 compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3 by printing or the like. , easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the substrate case 3 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position mark portion 541, which is a projection or a recess. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the plurality of members 511 that enclose the control board 501 may not include some of the outer case 45 , the inner case 40 and the cap 8 . Also, the plurality of members 511 may further include members different from the outer case 45 , the inner case 40 and the cap 8 .

Further, although the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are provided with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 may be provided with associated identifications 520 . For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 8 included in the plurality of members 511 . Further, the inner case 40 included in the plurality of members 511 may not have the identification mark 524 attached. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45 included in the plurality of members 511 . An inspector can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed by checking the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 . For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, it is possible to determine whether or not the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 are related. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501 , the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 . In this case, the inspector checks the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45, and the inner case 40, and easily confirms whether or not fraud has been committed. can be done. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45, and the inner case 40 are still relevant. The inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent act has been committed by determining whether or not the inspector has acted fraudulently. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the outer case 45 and the ROM 502 . In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification display 520 attached to the outer case 45 and the ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act has been carried out. For example, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraud, the inspector can easily determine whether or not the outer case 45 and the identification mark 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. You can confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all "ABCD01" etc.). Further, the identification indications 520 may be different indications, and the same identification indications 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Also, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, identifying indicia 520 may be various markings. Also, the manner in which the identification mark 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521 but all of the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed and added to the seal portion. Also, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the substrate case 3. FIG.

Further, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the substrate case 3 . The modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. A board case 1303 shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is a modified example of the board case 3 . A portion of the substrate case 1303 where the identification display 523 is displayed is called an identification display portion 1390 . Also, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391 . As shown in FIG. 62, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391 . Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 .

The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1390 (the material of the outer case 45 in this embodiment). The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381 , 1382 , 1383 , and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390 .

Character 1371 of “A” of identification display 523 is formed in hierarchy 1381 . The letter “B” 1372 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . The letter “C” 1373 is formed in hierarchy 1383 . The letter “D” 1374 is formed in hierarchy 1384 . A “0” character 1375 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . Character 1376 of “3” is formed in hierarchy 1383 .

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. Identification 523 may be formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser beam and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the substrate case 3 . By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3 .

In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than, for example, when the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the substrate case 3 . Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Also, if the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the circuit board case 1303 is scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 and provided. Therefore, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, in the board case 1303 , the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . In this case, compared to the case where L1 is less than or equal to L2, it is necessary to grind the substrate case 3 deeper when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520 . Therefore, the substrate case 1303 is easily damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

It should be noted that the identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification displays 524, 525, etc., provided on the substrate case 1303 may be formed inside the substrate case 1303 in the same manner.

In the above embodiments, the substrate case 1303 is an example of the "case portion" of the present invention.

Also, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the substrate case 3 . In addition, the contents displayed on the printed portion (for example, the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 are not limited. For example, a substrate case 1551 according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 63, members having the same configuration as in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper portion of the laterally central portion of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1551 . The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 3 . The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53). In FIG. 63, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and description area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and writing area 1570 do not overlap ROM 502 .

Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded, and the like. contains information on Accordingly, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and the information such as whether or not the game machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the control board 501 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the description areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the upper left writing area 1570, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the upper right description area 1570, "Date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the description area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .

For example, when the inspector opens the board case 3, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the left writing area 1570, and writes the date of opening the board case 3 in the right writing area 1570. Note that the inspector may write in the writing area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was tampered with.

Seal portion 1560 includes viewing portion 1574 for viewing electronic component 798 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a peeping portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing regions 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged horizontally and the two writing regions 1570 on the upper side, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing regions 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 522 “ABCD02” of the ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU”, the model “GH101”, and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1596 is the model name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company". Note that the identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification section, that is, in this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification sections.

Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including identification indications 1595 and 1596 suggesting at least the same content. In the present embodiment, the identification marks 1595 and 1596 all have the same type name "CR AIU", model "GH101", and manufacturer name "AA Company", but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.

Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the substrate case 3 and the ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the control board 501 may include and display the same identification indications as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 .

As described above, the substrate case 1551, the control substrate 501, and the like according to this modification are formed. In this embodiment, since the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53), for example, the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the control board 501 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Also, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the substrate case 3 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the description area 1570). can. In addition, the inspector can also write in area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was tampered with. Also, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Moreover, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 798 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 798 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peeping portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the control board 501 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the ROM 502 is illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, since at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name. can be done. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, type, and manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Note that the shape of the ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 55, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected with the control board 501 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .

Various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. For example, FIG. 64 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 viewed obliquely from above. In FIG. 64, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502 . That is, FIG. 64 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle at which it is difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the ROM 502 . However, as shown in FIG. 63, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 63 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle where the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, the various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) is displayed at an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. I wish I could.

[Description of the eighth embodiment]
Next, an eighth embodiment, which is an example of embodiments of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-1 to 65-6. In the eighth embodiment described below, the same reference numerals as in the seventh embodiment are used for the same configurations as in the seventh embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 65-1 to 65-4, an overview of the configurations of the board case 1700 and the control board 1705 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65-1 is a rear view of a board case 1700 containing a control board 1705 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 65-2(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 65-2(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. FIG. 65-3(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, and FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram; FIG. FIG. 65-4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display configuration of the information display 1750. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65-1, the gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 that accommodates the control board 1705 . The substrate case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the substrate case 1551 which is a modification of the seventh embodiment, but includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an unsealing prohibition seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation portion 1785, which will be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501, which is a modification of the seventh embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key section 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

The seal portion 1710 is made of a light-transmissive material, and is attached to the upper portion of the center portion in the left-right direction of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1700 . Note that the seal portions 1710 are arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed in a lower portion of the center portion of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1700 in the left-right direction so as to protrude from the outer case 45 on the front side of the outer case 45 . The unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is affixed to a seal affixing portion 1701 formed on the right end portion of the substrate case 1700 in the left-right direction. Note that the seal sticking portion 1701 is a portion covered with the cap 8 . The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed at the lower right portion of the outer case 45 of the board case 1700 in the horizontal direction, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button of the control board 1705 . The operation key section 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated. The insertion opening of the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45 of the board case 1700, so that the control board 1705 can be moved to the board case. 1700 so as to be operable. The operation key section 1780 is connected to the main CPU that controls the game of the gaming machine 1 so that a signal indicating whether or not the operation key section 1780 has been operated can be transmitted.

The information display 1750 is provided at the upper right corner of the control board 1705 in the horizontal direction, and is arranged inside the board case 1700 made of transparent resin covering the control board 501 . The information display 1750 is located at a position different from the positions where the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM provided on the control board 501 are provided. It is provided at a position where visibility is not hindered by 1785, seal portion 1710, or the like. Further, none of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 are provided around or near the information display 1750 . Such an information display 1750 is conspicuous even though it is provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, so that the displayed information can be easily recognized visually.

Here, the information display 1750 and the out-ball detection switch (not shown) will be described. The out ball detection switch detects all game balls launched into the game area (referred to as "out balls" in this embodiment), and attaches the detection result data to the main control board 300 to the connection cable. connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the gaming machine 1 using numerical values calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch (values calculated by a calculation formula to be described later). be. Whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range makes it possible to determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine 1 is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 65-2(a), the seal portion 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal portion 1560, and includes a print portion 1711, a code portion 1712, an information display portion 1713, a description area 1570, and a viewing portion 1574. I have it. By reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display portion 1713. . In other words, predetermined information including specific information is displayed in different forms, such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 . Here, the configurations of code portion 1712 and information display portion 1713 are different from those of code portion 1572 and information display portion 1573 of seal portion 1560 . Specifically, the character string “EF001” is printed across the colored area of the code portion 1712 and the colored area of the information display portion 1713 . With the seal portion 1710 having such a configuration, if either the colored region of the code portion 1712 or the colored region of the information display portion 1713 is scraped off to illegally change the information, the seal portion 1710 will not be as strong as the seal portion 1560 . Traces of changes are likely to be clarified, and unauthorized changes of information can be deterred. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the peep portion 1574. This is because at least a part or the entirety of the electronic component 798 is attached to the control board. It means that it is possible not only to be visually recognizable through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction perpendicular to the control board, but also to be visible through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction that is not perpendicular to the control board but forms a predetermined angle. is. Specifically, an electronic component provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560, which is difficult to see from the direction perpendicular to the control board 1705 due to the colored region 1575, is covered by the seal portion 1560. 1560 can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction forming a predetermined angle instead of being perpendicular to it.

As shown in FIG. 65-2(b), the date mark portion 1720 is a portion for displaying the date when the circuit board case 1700 was manufactured, and is composed of a date display portion 1721 and a year/month display portion 1726. . The date display portion 1721 has a circular outer edge formed with scales from 1 to 31, and has a form in which the date of manufacture is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle. The year/month display portion 1726 has a scale from 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circle, and the month is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle, and the numbers formed at the center of the circle indicate the date of manufacture. It is in the form of showing the year. That is, the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 65-2(b) indicates that the board case 1700 was manufactured on "December 1, 2014". The date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 65-2(b) is when the outer case 45 is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, and the board case 1700 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1. If it does, it will be shown reversed (see, for example, FIG. 65-1).

As shown in FIG. 65-3(a), the unsealable seal portion 1730 includes an information display portion 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code portion 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) or the like is printed, and a hard-to-counterfeit A hologram display portion 1735 in which a hologram is formed is provided. By reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1732 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display portion 1731. good too. In other words, predetermined information including specific information may be displayed in different forms, such as a QR code (registered trademark) in code portion 1732 and a character string in information display portion 1731 .

As shown in FIG. 65-3(b), when the unsealable seal portion 1730 is attached to the seal attaching portion 1701, it is attached across the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1700. It is attached so as to cover part of the boundary portion 1738 when the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are combined. That is, since it comes into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, when the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are disassembled, the unsealing prevention seal portion 1730 is broken. In other words, the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is an identification display portion whose shape changes when the substrate case 1700 is disassembled, unlike the identification display portion such as the seal portion 1705 to which various identification information is attached. Further, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 are affixed to the back side of the game machine 1 in the sticker affixing portion 1701 so that the entire unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 can be visually recognized. Further, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 are provided at positions that are one step lower in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 than the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700. be done. In other words, the seal portion 1710 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 of the substrate case 1700 are configured to have different distances from a virtual plane extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control substrate 1705 . ing.

As shown in FIG. 65-4, the information display 1750 includes a control section (not shown), four 7-segment display sections 1770a to 1770d arranged in a horizontal line, and a It is composed of four formed dot display portions 1775a to 1775d. In addition, the information display 1750 displays the data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300 that has received the result detected by the out-ball detection switch 302a outputs the data measured based on the detection result. output is connected. Furthermore, the information display 1750 is always lit when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the information display 1750, two 7-segment display portions 1770a and 1770b and two dot display portions 1775a and 1775b located on the left side when viewed from the front are used as an identification display portion 1780a, and two The 7-segment display portions 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display portions 1775c and 1775d are assumed to be a ratio display portion 1780b. It is assumed that the four 7-segment display portions 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display portions 1775a to 1775d are connected by circuits.

[Description of Display Mode on Information Display 1750]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65-5 and 65-6, specific display modes on the information display 1750 will be described. FIG. 65-5 is a table for explaining the contents displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1 and the display format, and FIG. It is a table|surface explaining the content and display form to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 65-5, when the performance of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by the main control board 300 is displayed on the ratio display section 1780b. Specifically, when the game state is in a low-probability state in a predetermined interval from the first power-on (every time the total number of out-balls reaches 60000 after the total number of out-balls reaches 300 from the first power-on). The ratio between the number of balls paid out and the number of out balls when in a low probability state (for example, when it is not a time-saving game in a low probability state) is output. The number of balls) ÷ (the number of out balls in the low probability state) × 100”, and the value rounded to the first decimal place is output. In addition, when the numerical value to be output is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio display section. In addition, even when the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the measurements made so far are taken over as long as the RAM is not abnormal.

Identification display portion 1780a displays identifiable information about the types of numerical values displayed in ratio display portion 1780b. Specifically, when the measured value of the current section at the present time is displayed, "bL." ” to “b3.” are displayed. The flashing cycle in FIG. 65-5 is 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off, and the timing of display switching from "bL." to "b3." repeats display for 5.0 seconds in each display. shall be

Here, the flow of measurement in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. First, when the game machine 1 is powered on for the first time and a game is started, detection of a game ball discharged from the out ball discharge port in a low probability state is started by the out ball detection switch. Here, since the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge port are from all the out ports in the game area, the number of game balls based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch is the total number of out balls. After the total number of out balls reaches 300, a payout ball measurement switch (a switch for detecting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, not shown) for each predetermined section in the low probability state and A calculated value calculated by the main CPU is output on the information display 1750 based on the detection result of the out-ball detection switch.

Also, the game machine 1 can change the setting of the probability of a big win, and the setting of the probability of a big win can be changed by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation unit 1785 . Specifically, when the game machine 1 is powered on and the RAM clear button is set to "ON" by the setting key unit 1780 "ON", the setting of the jackpot probability is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. The setting can be confirmed by turning the setting key portion 1780 to "OFF" when the setting is desired to be changed. Further, when the power of the game machine 1 is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the current setting of the jackpot probability of the game machine 1 is displayed on the information display 1750 as will be described later. , you can check the settings. When the game machine 1 is shipped, when the recovery information is damaged, or when a recovery error occurs due to turning on/off the power while the settings are being changed, the power is on and the setting key 1780 is set to "ON" in the same manner as described above. If the clear button is set to "ON", the setting can be changed, but if the power is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the game will be stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65-6, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to the first setting (low probability: 1/300) to the sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). ) can be set in six steps. In this setting change and setting confirmation, in the 7-segment display section 1770d located on the right side of the information display section 1750, "1" to "6" are displayed according to the setting value to be changed or the setting value currently set. Lights up. Furthermore, when the setting is changed, all the 7-segment display portions 1770a to 1770d and the dot display portions 1775a to 1775d blink for 5 seconds after the setting change is completed. After blinking for 5 seconds, the performance of the game machine 1 is started to be displayed on the identification display portion 1780a and the ratio display portion 1780b. In addition, when changing settings and checking settings, a voice indicating the current state such as "Settings are being changed" or "Settings are being checked" and a warning siren are output while the settings are being changed/checked. A message such as "Changing settings/Checking settings" is displayed on the LCD. In such a gaming machine, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability, the selection rate of a specific effect ("first effect" in FIG. 65-6) at the time of a big win, It is assumed that the selection rate of the specific performance at the time is constant.

Here, the terms used in the table of FIG. 65-6 will be explained. “(At the time of a jackpot/at the time of a loss” first effect selection rate” means that the “first effect” is selected (executed) in the effect executed when a “jackpot” or “loss” is determined. As described above, this "first effect selection rate" is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each setting of the first setting to the sixth setting. The "first effect appearance rate" is the probability that the "first effect" will be executed in the effect executed based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device. The "first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "jackpot probability" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate".In addition, the "first effect appearance rate" when "losing" Is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "probability of losing" in each setting by the "first effect selection rate". In the judgment based on the ball entering the ball, it is the probability that it will be judged as "losing", and it is a numerical value that can be calculated by subtracting the "jackpot probability" from "1". , In the effect selected (executed) along with the determination based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the case of the non-probability variable gaming state, it is the probability that the "first effect" is executed. The "total first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that is the sum of the "first effect appearance rate at the time of a big win" and the "first effect appearance rate at the time of a loss" in each setting. Effect Reliability" refers to the executed ``first It is the probability that the "effect" is the "first effect" executed together with the determination of the "jackpot." It is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing by

[Action and effect of the eighth embodiment]
In the case of the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the seal portion 1720 is provided with the viewing portion 1574, so the inspector can inspect the substrate case through the viewing portion 1574. By visually checking the control board 1705 stored in 1700, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with compared to a game machine having a board case that is not provided with something like the peeping part 1574. , can lead to a reduction in the possibility of fraud. Further, in such a seal portion 1720, predetermined characters can be written in the writing region 1570, which is a plurality of colored regions. It is also easier for the inspector to check the contents of the information in letters, compared to stickers on which letters are written. Furthermore, in such a seal portion, transparent viewing portion 1574 is provided between description region 1570, code portion 1712, and information display portion 1713, which are a plurality of colored regions. The colored area is conspicuous compared to what is provided, and the inspector can easily confirm the characters and the like written in the writing area 1570 , the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 .

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the date of opening and the date mark described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 Although the date of manufacture displayed in section 1720 is different information, it has a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in description area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the date of manufacture displayed in date mark portion 1720 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the consistency between the date of opening of the written area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. can be easily verified.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealable seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed in the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 is associated with the information displayed on the unsealable seal portion 1730 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm fraud such as unauthorized exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information on the seal portion 1720 and the information on the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 . In addition, the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 has a distance from a virtual plane extending the control board 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the board case 1700 in the thickness direction. It is provided so as to be different from the distance to the cord portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 . Therefore, the inspector can see that the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are easily visible, and fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are different in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Since the layers are formed in layers, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so as to have different distances from the top surface of the board case 1700 . Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700, that is, in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than if there is. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in plan view, when the assembly 2 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, the characters 1371 and 1372 are separated from each other. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are arranged in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Since they are formed in different layers, the character 1371 of the layer 1381 and the character 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control substrate 1705 (for example, in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control substrate 1705). are formed to have different distances from the stretched imaginary plane). Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in plan view, when the assembly 2 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, the characters 1371 and 1372 are separated from each other. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

Further, in the case of the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are Information that is linked to each other and contains the same specific information is displayed in different manners. Therefore, it is difficult to tamper with the code portion 1712, and even if the information in the information display portion 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there has been fraud by checking the consistency with the code portion 1712. In addition, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts. Further, in seal portion 1720, peep portion 1574 is formed between code portion 1712 and information display portion 1713 and writing area 1570, so that control board 1705 can be tampered with in the same manner as described above. Since it is possible to easily check whether or not the information has been stolen, the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the present embodiment, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 have the viewing portion 1574. It is visible without intervention. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, making it easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, the information display device 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition when the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1 is opened, so it is required to exhibit the above effects.

[Other forms of the eighth embodiment]
Although the detailed description is omitted in the above-described embodiment, it also has seal portions 542, 1561, 1562, identification marks 521, 522, 523, and connectors 771-776. Of these, the seal portions 542, 1561, 1562 and the identification indications 521, 522, 523 display identifiable predetermined information, so they may be so-called identification indications. In addition, items displaying identifiable predetermined information include a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, and an information display device 1750 for displaying the performance display and setting display of the gaming machine. may be included in Furthermore, although not shown, among the various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, color codes displayed on lead resistors, identification codes displayed on network resistors, and model numbers displayed on ICs, capacitors, and transistors. Since the code or the like is also displayed with identifiable predetermined information, it may be regarded as an identification display. Since the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiment have different shapes of openings and different numbers of pins, the shape of the openings and the number of pins of each of the connectors 771 to 776 are identifiable information. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 near each of the connectors 771 to 776. This connector number is also identifiable information and is included in the identification display. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible from the viewing portion 1574 of the sealing portion 1710, but the area where the electronic components can be viewed is limited to this. However, as long as the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible through the board case 1705, various forms may be used, and the same effects can be obtained. For example, if an area that is difficult to see is provided in a plurality of colored areas, and the control board can be seen from an area with higher light transmission than the colored area between the plurality of difficult to see areas, the same applies to the area. effect. In addition, in these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the legs of the electronic parts, etc. are visible, and the same effect is achieved. . Moreover, in these visible areas, a transparent socket (connector) for the ROM, which will be described later, is also visible. are provided, their transparent sockets (connectors) are visible. If such a visible area is provided, there is a similar effect that it is possible to deter fraudulent acts on electronic components.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the identification mark 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, but as described with reference to FIGS. An identification mark 523 may be provided. Such identification display 523 may be composed of characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited to this and may be of various configurations. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of identifiable predetermined information, that is, composed of a plurality of identification indications. That is, a plurality of identification indications may be divided into a plurality of layers and formed. For example, it may be configured as shown in FIG. 65-7. FIG. 65-7 is a diagram explaining a modification of the identification display formed inside the member forming the substrate case, and (a) is a cross-sectional view of the identification display portion 1791 of the substrate case 1790 according to the modification. , and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a circuit board case 1795 according to a modification. It should be noted that the identification displays 1794 and 1799 in FIGS. 65-7 are formed by 3D laser engraving, for example, inside the identification display portions 1791 and 1796, similarly to the identification display 523 in FIGS. 61 and 62. . Also, the identification marks 1794, 1799 and the identification mark 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) may be formed by molding the board case with a mold.

As shown in FIG. 65-7(a), the identification indications 1794 on the circuit board case 1790 according to the modification are five identification indications of "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". It is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1791 (the material of the outer case). Further, the identification display 1794 is divided into three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1791 and provided. In identification 1794, "A" identification 1792b is formed in hierarchy 1793a, "B" identification 1792c is formed in hierarchy 1793b, and "C" identification 1792a and "0" are formed. The identification display 1792d of and the identification display 1792e of "3" are formed so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 65-1) in the layer 1793c. When the identification display portion 1791 having such a configuration is viewed from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 65-1), each of "A", "B", and "C03" are different. The identification display 1794 can be visually recognized so as to form a hierarchy, and the identification display 1794 configured so that "C", "0", and "3" do not overlap.

As shown in FIG. 65-7(b), the identification mark 1799 on the circuit board case 1795 according to the modification is similar to the identification mark 1794, and includes "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". , and formed inside a member (material of the outer case) that forms the identification display portion 1796 . Further, the identification display 1794 is divided into four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1791 and provided. In identification 1799, identification 1797b of "A" is formed in hierarchy 1798a, identification 1797d of "B" and identification 1797c of "0" are formed in hierarchy 1798b, and identification 1797c of "0" is formed in hierarchy 1798b. identification 1797a is formed on level 1798c, and identification 1797e of "C" is formed on level 1798d. When the identification display portion 1796 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1, the characters "A", "B", and "C" can be visually recognized so as not to overlap in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65-1). When the identification display portion 1796 is viewed from the left side (from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 65-1), the identification display 1799 is configured such that "0" and "3" do not overlap in different layers. can be visually recognized.

According to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the distance from the top surface of the substrate case to the specific identification indication differs, and the distance from the substrate case to the specific identification indication varies. The distance from the control board 1705 to the particular identification can be different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b is set to have a smaller distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1790 than the identification display 1792a, but a larger distance from the control board 1705. formed. Further, the identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification mark 1792a but larger than the identification mark 1792b. On the other hand, the identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than the identification mark 1792a but smaller than the identification mark 1792b.

Further, according to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the surface constituting the thickness of the identification indication portion (the lateral side in FIG. 65-1) The distance from the forming surface) to the particular identification can also be configured differently. Further, according to the identification indications 1794, 1799 and the identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the top surface of the substrate case, the control substrate 1705, and the surfaces constituting the thickness of the identification indication portion It is also possible to configure such that the distance of the specific identification mark from either of the is substantially the same. As described above, if the identification mark is divided into a plurality of layers and formed inside the member forming the identification display portion, it is difficult to remove each identification mark as described above, and if it is scraped and removed Since traces of removal remain in the , the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. In the above, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification sign means the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification sign.

Further, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, it is possible to configure the identification display so that the visible direction and angle are different for each identification display. Specifically, as described above, identification display 1797a and identification display 1797b in identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this manner, the identification display can be formed in a direction or angle that is easily visible by the inspector, which can lead to suppression of fraudulent behavior. In the vicinity of the identification display part, if there is a member that hinders the visibility of the identification display (for example, a member that is thicker than the identification display part), the visibility is not hindered by the member. Each identification can also be formed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the identification display portion, it is possible not to provide a member that obstructs the visual recognition of the identification display.

Furthermore, in the above-described identification indications 1794 and 1799, the identification indications 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e are individually independent. It may be something that constitutes an identification mark. Specifically, in the identification display 1794, two identification displays 1792b and 1792c constitute identifiable predetermined information, and three identification displays 1792a, 1792d and 1792e constitute identifiable predetermined information. may be In the identification display 1799, two identification displays 1797a and 1797c constitute identifiable predetermined information, and three identification displays 1797b, 1797d and 1797e constitute identifiable predetermined information. Different identification indications may be configured according to different directions and angles. Further, in the identification displays 1794 and 1799, each of the five identification displays may constitute one piece of identifiable predetermined information, similar to the identification display 523 described with reference to FIGS. Specific examples of such five identification indications constituting one piece of identifiable predetermined information include a combination of "manufactured", "manufactured", "number", "number", and "no.". More specifically, for example, in the identification display section 1791, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on hierarchy 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed on hierarchy 1793b as identification displays, and hierarchy 1793c is displayed. "NO." In addition, in the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), the identification display "manufactured" is displayed at the position of the identification display 1371 of the hierarchy 1381, and the identification display " is displayed as an identification display at the position of the identification number 1373 of the hierarchy 1383, "number" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification number 1374 of the hierarchy 1384, and identification display 1375 of the hierarchy 1382 is displayed. is displayed as the identification display at the position of , and "1234" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383 .

According to the identification displays 1794 and 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), the identification displays are "A", "B", "C", "0" and "3". Although it is configured with five identification indications, it is not limited to this, and identification indications of various modes may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display section 1791, the hierarchy 1793a displays the “manufacturer name” as the identification display, the hierarchy 1793b displays the “model name” as the identification display, and the hierarchy 1793c displays the “manufacturing place” as the identification display. "Date of manufacture" and "Material name of control board" may be displayed. Further, as another specific example of the identification display section 1791, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, a "model name" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, and an identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c. The display may be such that the "manufacturer name" is displayed. Further, in the identification display portion 1791, "manufactured" and "manufactured" are displayed as identification displays on layer 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed on layer 1793b as identification displays, and "NO" is displayed on layer 1793c as identification displays. .” and “1234” may be displayed.

In the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), the hierarchy 1381 displays the “manufacturer name” as the identification display, the hierarchy 1382 displays the “model name” as the identification display, and the hierarchy 1383 displays the “model name” as the identification display. It is also possible to display "manufacturing location" and "manufacturing date" as identification displays, and display "material name of control board" as identification display in layer 1384. FIG. Further, as another specific example of the identification display unit 1390, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1381, a "model name" is displayed on the hierarchy 1382 as an identification display, and an identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. It is also possible to display the “manufacturer name” as the display and the “control board material name” as the identification display in the hierarchy 1384 . Further, in the identification display section 1390, "Made" and "Made" are displayed as identification displays on the hierarchy 1381, "Number" and "No." are displayed on the hierarchy 1382 as identification displays, and "NO" is displayed on the hierarchy 1383 as the identification display. .” is displayed, “1234” is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1384, and each identification display is displayed so as not to overlap so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine 1. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display formed on the identification display portion of the board case has been described in detail, but the identifiable predetermined information may be displayed on the control board. For example, in some control means having a control board and a board case, various identification marks are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, the "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display at the position closest to the top surface of the board case, and the position closer to the control board than the "QR code (registered trademark)" as the identification display. In some cases, the "model name" is displayed as an identification display, and the "manufacturer's name" is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

[Description of the ninth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66-1 to 66-9, a ninth embodiment, which is one of modifications of the above-described seventh embodiment of the present invention, will be described. FIG. 66-1 is a rear view of the board case 1803 in which the control board 501 according to the ninth embodiment is housed. FIG. 66-2 is a diagram showing a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed obliquely from above through the seal portions 1560 and 1561. FIG. 66-3 is (a) a plan view and (b) a side view of the transparent socket 1801. FIG. 66-4 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of substrate cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. 66-5 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. FIG. 66-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display section 541. FIG. FIG. 66-7 is an illustration of one method of reducing the optical transparency of the seal 1560. FIG. FIG. 66-8 is a schematic rear view of case portion 1813 housing prize ball substrate 1811. FIG. FIG. 66-9 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 housing the effect board 1821. FIG. In the ninth embodiment described below, the same reference numerals as in the seventh embodiment are used for the same configurations as in the seventh embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66-1, the game machine 1 of the ninth embodiment mainly includes a control board 501, a ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, a plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501, and these. a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 attached to the case portion 1803; a seal portion 1562 attached to the ROM 502; The parts other than the case part 1803 have already been explained. Case portion 1803 has substantially the same contents as case portion 1551 except that position display portion 541 is provided on seal portion 1560 .

As described above, the information identification portion refers to a seal portion with an identification mark, but in the description of the ninth embodiment, a seal portion without an identification mark will not appear. Therefore, in the description of the ninth embodiment, the seal portion will be called an information identification portion. Specifically, the seal portion 1560 may be called a first seal portion, and may be called a first information identification portion. The seal portion 1561 may be called a second seal portion, and may be called a second information identification portion. The seal portion 1562 may be called a third information identification portion. Also, it is possible to regard the entire seal portion as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification portions rather than as one information identification portion. For this reason, for example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, it may be described as including three information identification portions.

[Mounting part of ROM 502]
In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is detachably attached to the control board 501 via a transparent socket (connector) 1801, as shown in FIG. 66-3. FIG. 66-3(a) is a plan view of the ROM mounted in the transparent socket, and FIG. 66-3(b) is a side view of the ROM mounted in the transparent socket. Note that the control board 501 is omitted in both figures. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but is taller and the resin portion of the socket is made of a transparent material. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether an improper wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as so-called hanging boards. Furthermore, when the transparent socket 1801 is mounted on the control board 501, the pins 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 are visible. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

[Position display part 541] Cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is recessed. FIG. 66-4(d) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of the case portion 1803 at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. As shown in FIG. 66-4(d), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is a linear recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803, which is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. It is a concave portion recessed toward the rear side. A seal portion 1560 having a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803 .

As a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portions 1103 and 1203, and the seal portion 1560 is positioned on the outer surface 531 using this as a mark. You may make it stick (not shown). As another modification, as shown in FIG. 66-4(c), the position display portion 541 may be a linear protrusion. FIG. 66-4(c) shows a cross-section of case portion 1807, which is a modification of case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1. As shown in FIG. 66-4(c), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is a linear projection formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807, which is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. , protruding anteriorly. A seal portion 1560 having a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1807 . That is, the position display portion 541 described in this paragraph and the preceding paragraph is formed on the inner surface 532 by concave and/or convex.

In this way, when the concave and/or convex position display portion is formed on the inner surface 532 and the seal portion 1560 is adhered to the outer surface 531, the position display portion 541 remains the same as the seal portion 1560 regardless of where the seal portion is adhered. Since there is no interference, it does not interfere with application. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion 541 , the inspector can easily confirm the printed portion 1571 printed on the seal portion 1560 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, when a seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 is the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 and/or the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, Or/and the inside and outside of the sealing part 1560 can be formed so as to intersect. This will be briefly explained. In FIG. 66-6, the position display portion 541a provided on the case portion 1820 is formed on the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, and the portion of the position display portion 541b extending in the left-right direction in the drawing corresponds to the seal portion 1560. It was formed to intersect the inside and outside. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the drawing is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and it can be said that this is also formed so as to intersect the inside and the outside.

Further, as a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. may be provided. FIG. 66-2(a) shows an arrow-direction cross-section of a case portion 1805, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66-2(a), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1805 is a linear projection that is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and formed on the outer surface 531. Protruding. A seal portion 1560 with a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the inner side of the position display portion 541 .

Since the position display portion 541, which is a linear convex portion, is provided, for example, when the seal portion 1560 is touched by a hand, the seal portion 1560 is more likely to be removed than when the seal portion 1560 is attached to the flat case portion. Peeling can be prevented. That is, it is possible to use the seal portion 1560 as a mark to be attached, and to prevent the seal portion 1560 from peeling off after the attachment. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion 1560 is protected by such a position display portion 541 , the inspector can easily confirm the printed portion 1571 printed on the seal portion 1560 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

As another modified example, as shown in FIG. may be linear recesses. FIG. 66-2(b) shows an arrow-direction cross-section of a case portion 1806, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66-2(b), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1806 is a linear recess formed on the outer surface 531 that is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. It is a concave recess. A seal portion 1560 having a printed portion 1571 printed thereon is attached to the inner side of the position display portion 541 .

As another modified example, as shown in FIG. may also be provided on inner surface 532 . FIG. 66-5(a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a position corresponding to the CC line shown in FIG. 66-1 in case portion 1809 which is a modification of case portion 1803. The position display portion 541 on the outer surface 531 protects the seal portion 1560 , and the position display portion 541 on the inner surface 532 allows the seal portion 1560 to be adhered to a more accurate position.

As another modified example, as shown in FIG. may be defined as a convex portion and a concave portion. FIG. 66-5(b) shows a cross section of a case portion 1810, which is a modification of the case portion 183, at a position corresponding to line CC shown in FIG. 66-1. Seal portion 1560 can be more protected.

Although the position display portion 541 is a convex portion and/or a concave portion, it may not be a convex portion and/or a concave portion as long as the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached can be displayed. The position display portion 541 is formed at a position avoiding a viewing portion 1574, which will be described later. It should be noted that the term "formed" is not limited to being integrally formed, but also includes being attached with a seal or the like. Further, the position display portion 541 may be an L-shaped one that displays the position of a portion (corner portion) of the seal portion 1560 . Further, the predetermined position behind the first surface 531 of the case portion 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803 . If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40, and the seal portion 1560 is attached with the substrate 501 included. A position indicator 541 may be provided on the substrate, if desired.

[Seal portion 1560]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66-1, the seal portion 1560 printed with the printed portion 1571 has lower light transmittance than the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, and is transparent to the electronic component 595. It has a predetermined light transmittance. The optical transparency of seal 1560 need not be uniform. For example, the light transmission may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmittance differs depending on the part, it is sufficient that the light transmittance as a whole is lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561 . Also in this embodiment, a pattern of thin lines is printed in the hatched portion in the figure to reduce the light transmittance. The fact that the light transmittance differs depending on the pattern will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 66-7. In FIG. 66-7(a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wavy pattern, and in FIG. 66-7(b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a lattice pattern. Both companies can see through the electronic component 595, but it can be seen that the light transmittance of FIG. 66-7(a) is lower.

The case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance slightly lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 . As a result, the ROM 502 is visible due to the optical transparency of the case portion 1803 , and the electronic component 595 is visible due to the optical transparency of the sealing portion 1561 or the sealing portion 1560 . As a method of making the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, the light transmittance of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be lowered. You can reduce the permeability.

Forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult than when the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 and the light transmittance of the case portion 1551 and the seal portion 1561 are the same, and the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. In addition, when the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, it is not apparent at first glance that the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66-1, a unique character that can be identified only when viewed from a predetermined angle is attached to a portion of the seal portion 1560 that is not colored region 1575 but is not marked with predetermined characters. Information 1804 (K in this embodiment) is displayed. In this embodiment, characters are used, but symbols or drawings may be used. Further, the continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first area 1814 in which unique information is formed by patterns and the second area 1815 in which unique information is formed by characters and patterns. This makes it more difficult to forge the seal portion 1560, thereby further suppressing the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Note that the seal portion 1560 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 66-2, at least one or more different electronic components 595 are attached in the range visible through the seal portion 1561 and the range visible through the seal portion 1560 . By attaching a seal portion having optical transparency according to the type of the electronic component 595, fraud can be easily discovered and fraud can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The information to be written on the seal portion 1561 may include the model name, model code, external terminal information, manufacturer name, QR code (registered trademark), rated voltage, power consumption, precautions, and the like. In addition, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are pasted at a position having an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

[First Display, Second Display]
Further, in the present embodiment, the case portion 1803 including the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the electronic component 595 is called control means, and the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined locations in the control means. ing. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 have different distances from the surface 501a of the control board 501 on which the ROM 502 is mounted until the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are displayed. Note that the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 do not indicate only the identification display section 1390, but are provided in the control means, as shown in FIG. If the distance from the surface 501a is different, this is also included. The surface 501a of the control board 501 on the side of the outer case 45, the opposite surface thereof, the marking on the inner case 40, the marking on the outer case 45, various seals, and the like are assumed.

However, it is assumed that the information identification part and the display do not represent the same information. It should be noted that the seal portion and the information identification portion are not synonymous, and one seal portion may include a plurality of information identification portions. For example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, it means that there are three information identification portions. An example will be given to explain the relationship between the information identification unit and the display. For example, if the first information identification portion is the manufacturer's name, the first display is not the manufacturer's name, but the model name displayed on the sticker, for example. The second display is, for example, the model name displayed on the inner case 40 side surface of the board 501 . The second information identification portion is, for example, information about the person who opened the seal portion 1560 , and the third information identification portion is, for example, the name of the manufacturer of the seal portion 1562 . Since the control means is provided with the complicated first display and second display that the distance from the control board is different, counterfeiting of the board 501 and the case portion 1803 can be prevented.

[Prize ball board 1811]
Also, in this embodiment, the prize ball substrate 1811 and its case portion 1813 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 66-8, the prize ball substrate 1811 capable of two-way communication with the control substrate 501 is accommodated in a case portion 1813 having optical transparency. A ROM 1812 is attached to the prize ball board 1811 . In addition, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the prize ball board 1811 . The ROM 1812 stores data used for controlling prize balls.

A seal portion 1816 made of a light-transmissive material is attached to the case portion 1813 . The seal portion 1816 is printed with a plurality of colored regions 1817, which are regions with reduced light transmittance. In addition, the sealing portion 1816 has a peep portion 1819 through which the electronic component 595 can be seen, in a portion between the colored regions 1817 where the predetermined characters are not attached. Sealing portion 1560 and sealing portion 1816 are optically transparent so that electronic component 595 can be seen through, and sealing portion 1560 and sealing portion 1816 are different in optical transparency. In this embodiment, seal portion 1560 has lower light transmittance than seal portion 1816 . For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 66-7(a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 66-7(b).

Since the seal part 1560 and the seal part 1816 have different optical transparency, it is difficult to forge the seal parts 1560 and 1816, and to make it difficult to fraudulently replace the case parts 1551 and 1813 with the wrong substrates 501 and 1811. can be done. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Although not provided in the present embodiment, the case portion 1813 including the prize ball substrate 1811, the ROM 1812, and the electronic component 595 is used as the prize ball means, and the first and second displays are placed at different predetermined locations in the prize ball means. A third representation and a fourth representation may be provided as in (1371, 1372).

[Production board 1821]
Also, in this embodiment, the effect board 1821 and its case portion 1823 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 66-9, an effect board 1821 capable of effect control by one-way communication from the control board 501 or prize ball board 1811 is accommodated in a case portion 1823 having light transmission properties. A ROM 1822 is mounted on the performance board 1821 . In addition, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the effect board 1821 . The ROM 1822 stores storage contents used for control of effects. The control board 501 and the prize ball board 1811 are foot type boards as shown in FIG. 66-6, and the performance board 1821 is a surface mount type board. Examples of surface mounting include double-sided surface mounting, single-sided surface mounting, full surface mounting, and partial surface mounting.

The case portion 1823 is formed of a material having light transmittance like the seal portion 1560, and is printed with a plurality of colored regions having reduced light transmittance. A seal portion having a viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 to be viewed is not affixed to the portion not marked with . A seal portion having a colored region and a peep portion is not attached to the case portion 1823 but is attached only to the case portion 1803 . Since the seal portions are treated differently in this way, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 67, the control board 501 may have a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b that is different from the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspects refer to differences that can be visually recognized. For example, the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b have different colors, or different shades of color. , the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are surrounded by lines or patterns, and the like, and the shape of the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are steps, and the like. can be used one or a combination of For example, the second region 1900b of the resist applied to the surface of the control substrate 501 may be colored darker or lighter green than the first region 1900a. Moreover, it is preferable to set the first area 1900a corresponding to the range in which the ROM 502 and the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501 . On the other hand, the second area 1900b is preferably set to correspond to a range in which the ROM 502, the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502, and board-mounted components such as the connectors 771 to 776 are not arranged on the control board 501. For example, , should be set at the edge of the control board 501 . In the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b themselves, the above-described colors and other aspects may be different. It is good also as a different aspect. The first area 1900a and the second area 1900b can be provided on either or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 and the front surface facing the back surface of the game board unit 12. FIG. Alternatively, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification section 1902 for displaying specific information in the second area 1900b. The information identification section 1902 may include an identification display 521 containing information similar to the identification display 529 described above. In this way, by providing the information identification section 1902 in the second area 1900b that is different in form from the first area 1900a, the information displayed in the information identification section 1902 can be made easier to see. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether or not the control board 501 has been tampered with, and management can be facilitated. Then, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

When distinguishing the control board 501 in particular, the board excluding board-mounted components such as the mounted electronic components 502 and 595 is sometimes referred to as a "board", and a "board" on which board-mounted components are mounted is referred to as a "board". It is sometimes called a control unit. The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are preferably provided on the substrate, but regions of different modes may be provided on the substrate-mounted component.

The identification display 523 described above is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390, and only the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45 is provided. In addition, the identification display 524 provided on the inner case 40, the identification display 525 provided on the cap 8, the identification display 521 provided on the control board 501, the identification display 522 provided on the ROM 502, etc. are attached to the control unit. It can be applied to identification 520 . Objects divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, and may be a display consisting of a plurality of identifiers such as figures, patterns, codes, and combinations of characters. For example, the relationship between identification marks 520 may be divided into hierarchies 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

The positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are described with reference to the object provided with the identification display 523 (thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390). If the position is different in the thickness direction of the outer case 45 and the identification mark 524 provided on the inner case 40 is different, the position is different in the thickness direction of the inner case 40 and the identification mark 521 provided on the control board 501 or board-mounted components. , 522, the positions are different in the thickness direction of the substrate. The identification mark 521 attached to the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board. It can be said that it is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate from the identification mark attached to the front surface. In addition, the outer case 45 constituting the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted is further away from the board than the inner case 40 in order to secure an installation space for the board-mounted components. and the identification mark 524 attached to the inner case 40 are at different positions in the thickness direction of the substrate.

The identification indications associated with each other are not limited to the form in which the relationship can be directly recognized by the manufacturer, etc., but can be compared with the information held by the administrator, or converted by the device owned by the administrator. It may be a relationship in which the relevance can be grasped by doing. For example, even if the identification marks 523 to 525 attached to the board case 3 do not include identifiers that match the identification marks 521 and 522 attached to the control board 501, the information held by the administrator can be referred to. and that both identification marks 520 contain common information. In other words, the identification indications associated with each other may include a mode in which the relevance can be directly grasped from visually recognizable information and a mode in which the relevance cannot be directly grasped from visually recognizable information. . In this manner, since the relationship between identification indications cannot be seen at a glance, it becomes difficult for anyone other than the manufacturer or administrator to rewrite the information, and the possibility of fraud can be reduced, allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In this case, "first display", "second display", "third display", "fourth display", "first information display", "second information display", "first information identification part", The "second information identification section", the "third information identification section", and the "fourth information identification section" are not limited to those described in the above embodiments, and the seal, code information and characters printed on the seal, and , model name, manufacturer's name, board management information, case management information, and other information display methods and display contents about the game machine on the board or board case.

(Other embodiments)
(1) In the first embodiment, the logic unit 1530 is provided on the production control board 320, but the logic unit 1530 may be provided on a board different from the production control board 320 and the lamp control board 340, and may be a so-called external board. . If it does in this way, it will become possible to reuse the conventional production|presentation control board 320. FIG.

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the logic unit 1530 is composed of the first XOR 1601, the buffer 1602, the resistor 1603, the capacitor 1604, the second XOR 1605, the polarity reversing element 1606 and the D-FlipFlop 1607, and the length of the transmission line Even if there is a delay in the CLK and DATA signals due to differences in speed or noise, and the CLK and DATA signals cannot be synchronized, the correct LED control signal can be generated from the CLK and DATA signals. I was able to generate it. On the other hand, when no signal delay or the like occurs in the transmission line, as shown in FIG. It may be substituted as

(3) In the first to third embodiments, the two-wire driver 1510 was used, but another LED driver that performs data transmission in a double-wire system, such as a three-wire or parallel communication LED driver may be used.

◇ [Invention A-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of invention A-1, the role products (347, 348) controlled by the predetermined signals, the first signal (CLK signal (a)) and the second signal ( DATA signal (b)) to generate a third signal (signal (g)), control means (320, 1530, 4450, 4630) capable of transmitting the third signal, activating means (1520) for receiving and activating the accessory based on the third signal.

In the gaming machine 100 of the first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention A-1, the control board 320, the logic section 1530, and the lamp CPU 4450 generate control signals from the CLK signal and the DATA signal. , and the one-wire driver 1520 can operate the board lighting device 347 and the board driving device 348 based on the control signals. With such a game machine 100, the number of parts in the transmission path of the control signal can be reduced, and the space required for the transmission path can be reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the number of points, the possibility of failure is reduced, leading to a reduction in the interruption time of the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

◇ [Invention A-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of Invention A-2, a control means (300) capable of transmitting a first signal (CLK signal (a)) and a second signal (DATA signal (b)) is connected to the control means. and a display device (125) for displaying predetermined game information by means of LEDs, the display device generating a third signal (signal (g)) from the first signal and the second signal from the control means. The gist of the present invention is that the LED is turned on or off based on the third signal to display predetermined game information.

In the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention A-2, the logic unit 1530 of the display device 125 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal, The wired driver 1520 can control the light emission of the indicator LED based on one control signal generated by the logic unit 1530 . With such a gaming machine 100, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100. FIG.

◆ [Invention B]
In the gaming machine (100) of invention B, the first role (347, 348) controlled by the predetermined signal, the second role (345, 346) controlled by the predetermined signal, and the first signal ( A control means (320a, 4350, 4450) capable of transmitting a CLK signal (a)) and a second signal (DATA signal (b)), and a third signal ( A conversion means (1530, 4450) capable of generating a signal (g)) and transmitting the third signal, receiving the third signal from the conversion means, and operating the first role product based on the third signal. A first operating means (1520) and a second operating means (1510) for receiving the first signal and the second signal from the control means and operating the second role product based on the first signal and the second signal. and

In the gaming machine 100 of the first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention B, the sub CPU 320a and the lamp CPUs 4350 and 4450 transmit the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and the logic unit 1530 and the lamp CPU 4450 generates and transmits a control signal from the CLK signal and the DATA signal, the one-wire driver 1520 operates the board lighting device 347 and the board driving device 348 based on the control signal, and the two-wire driver 1510 receives the CLK signal. and the DATA signal, the frame lighting device 345 and the frame driving device 346 can be operated. With such a gaming machine 100, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100. For example, conventionally, both the game board unit and the glass frame 150 have two wires. In a game machine using a driver 1510, a new game board unit using a 1-wire driver 1520 can be replaced with a conventional game board unit (using a 2-wire driver 1510). becomes. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the transmission path of the control signal, and to reduce the number of parts by reducing the space required for the transmission path and installing parts that were difficult to install in the past. Since it is possible, the possibility of failure is reduced, leading to a reduction in the interruption time of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine (100) of invention B described above, the conversion means generates the fourth signal (signal (c)) by calculating from the first signal and the second signal using a predetermined logical expression, A fifth signal (signal (d)) generated from the signal and the first signal are calculated by a predetermined logical expression to generate a sixth signal (signal (e)), and the fourth signal and the sixth signal are calculated. The gist of the invention is to generate a third signal from a signal.

In the gaming machine 100 of the above-described first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention B, the logic unit 1530 outputs the signal (c) by the exclusive OR of the CLK signal and the DATA signal in the first XOR 1601. is generated from the CLK signal (d) generated from the CLK signal in the first-order delay circuit 1608 and the CLK signal (a), the second XOR 1605 generates the signal (e) by exclusive OR, and the first XOR 1601 generates A control signal (g) can be generated by the D-FlipFlop 1607 from the generated signal (c) and the signal (e) generated by the second XOR 1605 . With such a game machine 100, even if the CLK signal and the DATA signal are delayed due to the difference in the length of the transmission line, noise, etc., and the CLK signal and the DATA signal cannot be synchronized. Also, a correct LED control signal can be generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal to appropriately perform various controls.

A gaming machine corresponding to the fourth embodiment is
an object controlled by a predetermined signal;
a control means capable of generating a third signal (LED control signal) from a first signal (DATA signal) and a second signal (CLK signal) for operating the accessory and transmitting the third signal;
actuating means for receiving the third signal from the control means and actuating the role object based on the third signal;
with
The actuation means is configured to be capable of outputting the third signal to other actuation means connected at a later stage upon receiving the third signal,
The gist is that the control means is configured to be capable of transmitting the third signal to the operating means connected in multiple stages.

A gaming machine corresponding to the fifth embodiment is
a game area in which game balls flow down;
A first light emitting unit having a plurality of first light emitters, arranged in plurality along the outer periphery of the game area, and capable of emitting light according to the game state;
A second light emitting unit having a plurality of second light emitters, arranged in plurality along the outer periphery of the game area, and capable of emitting light according to the game state;
with
The first light emitting unit is
Among the plurality of first light emitters, a large number are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area,
The second light emitting unit is
The gist is that a large number of the plurality of second light emitters are arranged substantially radially with respect to the outer circumference of the game area.

A game machine corresponding to the sixth embodiment is
a main control means for controlling a game;
a main storage means provided in the main control means for storing information necessary for game control;
A sub-control means for controlling a game based on information from the main control means;
a sub-storage means provided in the sub-control means for storing information necessary for game control;
a main power supply connected to an external power supply to supply power to the main control means through the main wiring and to supply power to the sub-control means through the sub-wiring;
power is supplied to at least the main storage means when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, and when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped and via the main wiring a secondary power supply that does not supply power to at least the main storage means when power supply from the main power supply to the main control means is stopped;
The gist is to provide

Also, in the gaming machine corresponding to the sixth embodiment,
The secondary power supply
power is supplied to at least the sub-storage means when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, and when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped and via the sub wiring When the power supply from the main power source to the sub control means is stopped, at least the power supply to the sub storage means is not performed.

◆ [Invention 1]
A game machine of invention 1 (game machine 1) comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board a control means (assembly 2) having a case 1700); a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material; A first information display portion (description region 1570, code portion 1712, information display portion 1713) for displaying information about the control means, and a position different from the seal portion in the storage portion to display information about the control means. and a second information display portion (date mark portion 1720) for displaying a plurality of colored regions (printing portion 1711, a plurality of region 1575) and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, a portion where a predetermined character is not attached, and the storage and a visible region (peeping portion 1574) in which the control board housed in the portion can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in Invention 1, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 Although the displayed date of manufacture is different information, it has a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in description area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the date of manufacture displayed in date mark portion 1720 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the consistency between the date of opening of the written area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. can be easily verified.

◆ [Invention 2]
The game machine of invention 2 (game machine 1) comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board a control means (assembly 2) having a case 1700); a first seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a material having optical transparency; A first information display portion (code portion 1712, information display portion 1713) and a second information display portion (description area 1570) for displaying information about the control means provided, and the first seal portion in the storage portion and a third information display portion (code portion 1732) provided in the second seal portion for displaying information about the control means. and, wherein the first information display unit and the third information display unit include an identification display in a predetermined manner readable by a terminal device, and the second information display unit reduces the light transmittance between a plurality of colored regions (printing portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) that are the regions where the and a visible region (peek portion 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage portion can be viewed, which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character, and the third information display portion includes: In the thickness direction of the storage section, the distance from a virtual plane obtained by extending the control board in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section is the distance from the virtual plane to the first information display section. are provided differently.

According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 as in Invention 2, the information displayed in the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is It is associated with the information displayed on the prohibition sticker portion 1730 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm fraud such as unauthorized exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information on the seal portion 1720 and the information on the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 . In addition, the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 has a distance from a virtual plane extending the control board 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the board case 1700 in the thickness direction. It is provided so as to be different from the distance to the cord portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 . Therefore, the inspector can see that the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 are easily visible, and fraudulent actions such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

◆ [Invention 3]
A game machine (game machine 1) of invention 3 comprises a control means (assembly 2) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551, 1700) for storing the control board; A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means are provided, and in the thickness direction of the storage portion, from the top surface of the storage portion The gist is that the distance to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage portion to the second information display.

According to the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in Invention 3, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Therefore, the character 1371 of the layer 1381 and the character 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed so that the distance from the top surface of the substrate case 1700 is different. Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700, that is, in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification display 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove than if there is. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in plan view, when the assembly 2 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, the characters 1371 and 1372 are separated from each other. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 4]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1) of invention 4 comprises control means (assembly 2) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and a storage section (board case 1551, 1700) for storing the control board; A first information display (characters 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (characters 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and a predetermined surface of the control board in the thickness direction of the control board. to the first information display is different from the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in Invention 4, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display portion 1390. Therefore, the character 1371 on the layer 1381 and the character 1372 on the layer 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control substrate 1705 (for example, a virtual surface of the control substrate 1705 extending in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). are formed at different distances from the surface). Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, it is easier to remove than, for example, the case where the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at positions with different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed illegally, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the substrate case 1700. Therefore, it is possible for the inspector to detect illegal acts. It can be said that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts as well as it is easy to do. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap and are separated from each other in plan view, when the assembly 2 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, the characters 1371 and 1372 are separated from each other. The character 1372 can be viewed from a bird's-eye view, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been fraudulent activity with respect to the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 5]
A game machine of invention 5 (game machine 1) comprises a control board (control boards 501, 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and the control board so that the plurality of electronic components can be visually recognized. A storage portion (substrate case 1551, 1700) which stores and has optical transparency, and a first information display portion attached to the storage portion for displaying predetermined information (code portions 1572, 1712, information display portions 1573, 1713). ) and a second information display portion (description area 1570), wherein the first information display portion is displayed in a first mode including specific information and a second mode different from the first mode, and the The second information display portion is formed of a material having light transmittance, and includes a plurality of colored regions (printed portions 1571 and 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and the plurality of and a region (peek portion 1574) in which the control board can be visually recognized, between a first colored region of the colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. and

In the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in Invention 5, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are linked to each other. In addition, information containing the same specific information is displayed in different manners. Therefore, it is difficult to tamper with the code portion 1712, and even if the information in the information display portion 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there has been fraud by checking the consistency with the code portion 1712. In addition, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts. Also, in the seal portion 1720, a peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the description area 1570, so that the control board 1705 can be tampered with in the same manner as described above. Since it is possible to easily check whether or not the information has been stolen, the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

◆ [Invention 6]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 6 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a case portion (1803) having a first light transmissivity and enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a seal portion (1560) provided in the case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion is
Having a second light transmittance that is lower than the first light transmittance and allows the electronic component to be viewed,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. The gist of the invention is that it has a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed through the second optical transparency.

Since the peeping portion is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component through the peeping portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peeping portion is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced. Also, since a plurality of colored areas are provided, it is possible to write, for example, the inspector's name and the date when the substrate case was opened. Also, the inspector can write in the area the date when it was confirmed whether or not the control board was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion is provided between the regions, the regions are more conspicuous than when only the regions are provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved. In addition, since the light transmittance of the seal portion is lower than that of the case portion, it is difficult to forge the seal portion, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as replacing the entire case portion with an illegal board. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 7-1]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 7-1 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a light-transmitting case portion (1803) that encloses the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
a position display portion (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case portion and serving as a mark of the position where the seal portion is attached;
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion is
A portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. The gist is to have a peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be peeped.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification indicia along the position indicia. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach the identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification marks are attached to the same positions among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification marks. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, since the position display portion is formed on the inner surface and the seal portion is attached to the outer surface, the position display portion does not interfere with the seal portion no matter where the seal portion is attached. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the substrate case. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 7-2]
In addition, the gaming machine of Invention 7-2 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
a light-transmitting case portion (1803) that encloses the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
a position display portion (541), which is a convex portion and/or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion and serves as a mark of the position where the seal portion is attached;
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion is
A portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. The gist is to have a peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be peeped.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification indicia along the position indicia. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach the identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification marks are attached to the same positions among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification marks. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

In addition, since the outer surface to which the seal portion is attached is provided with a convex portion and/or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion and/or a position display portion that is a concave portion, for example, if the substrate case is touched by a hand, the substrate case The peeling of the seal can be prevented as compared with the case where the seal portion is attached to the flat surface of the tape. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector has to confirm whether it is due to fraud, and the inspection takes time. However, since the seal portion is protected by such a position display portion, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the substrate case. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 8]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 8 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having a first optical transparency for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
It is formed of a second light transmittance that is lower in light transmittance than the first light transmittance and that allows the electronic component to be viewed,
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having a lower light transmittance than the second light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. and a peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be seen through the second optical transparency.

In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out by checking the storage means and the storage section both having the same identification display. In addition, even if the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can determine whether or not the identification marks attached to the storage means and the storage section are the same. , it is easy to confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 9-1]
A gaming machine (1) of Invention 9-1 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having optical transparency, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
a second information identification portion (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage portion and displaying specific information;
a third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
a position display part (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage part and serving as a mark of the position where the second information identification part is attached,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. and a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆ [Invention 9-2]
A gaming machine (1) of Invention 9-2 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having optical transparency, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
a second information identification portion (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage portion and displaying specific information;
a third information identification unit (1562, 1598) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
A position display portion (541), which is a protrusion and/or recess formed on the outer edge of the second information identification portion on the first surface of the storage portion and serves as a mark for the position where the second information identification portion is attached. ) and
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. and a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆ [Invention 10]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 10 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a light-transmitting case portion (1803) that encloses the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first seal portion (1561) and a second seal portion (1560) provided in the case portion and formed of a light-transmitting material,
The second seal portion is
It has a lower light transmittance than the first seal portion and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance that allows the electronic component to be viewed,
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. a viewing portion (1574) that enables viewing of the electronic component with the predetermined optical transparency;
The gist is that it has

According to the present invention, since the light transmittance of the second seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the first seal portion, it becomes difficult to forge the second seal portion. can make it difficult to act. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 11]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 11 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having optical transparency, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
A first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and formed of a light-transmissive material to display specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
It has a light transmittance lower than that of the first information identification portion and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized,
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. a viewing portion (1574) that enables viewing of the electronic component with the predetermined optical transparency;
The gist is that it has

◆ [Invention 12]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 12 comprises a substrate (501), a control unit including electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) containing the control unit. and a case part (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including the electronic component (502, In the member (45) constituting the mounting surface side of 595), as an identification mark (523) related to the identification marks (521, 522) attached to the control section, in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) The gist is that a first indication (1371) and a second indication (1372) having different distances from the substrate (501) are attached.

In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is illegally replaced, the identification of the board and the identification of the case will be different. , facilitating the discovery of fraud by inspectors. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 13]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 13 comprises a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the mounting surface of the substrate (501), and a plurality of members ( 511) including a case portion (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), and as an identification mark (520) attached to the control means and associated with each other, the substrate (501) A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) are attached so that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is different, and the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is , has a third representation (1375) attached to be the same as the second representation (1372).

In this case, since the identification indications of the control means are related to each other, if the substrate is illegally replaced, the identification indication of the substrate and the identification indication of the case may become different, and the inspector may Behavior is easier to detect. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 14]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 14 comprises a substrate (501), a control unit including electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) containing the control unit. and a case portion (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including a case portion (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) having an identification mark attached to the control portion ( 521, 522) and related identification marks (523), a first mark (1371) and a second mark (1372) attached so that the positions in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) are different. In the control section, as the identification mark (520) related to the identification mark (523) attached to the case portion (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), the position in the thickness direction of the substrate is displayed. The gist is that a third indication and a fourth indication are given differently.

In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is illegally replaced, the identification of the board and the identification of the case will be different. , facilitating the discovery of fraud by inspectors. In addition, the identification mark is provided at positions with different distances from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction. can be made more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark, if the identification mark is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped, resulting in conspicuous damage to the case. This makes it easy to discover fraudulent activity and suppresses the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 15]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 15 comprises a control board (501) for controlling a game, storage means (502) provided on the control board (501) for storing memory contents used for controlling the game, A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501) different from the storage means (502), and the storage means (502) and the plurality of electronic components (595) are visible and difficult to contact. Light-transmitting storage units (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) stored in the storage unit (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) provided in the storage unit (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) to display specific information A first information identification section (523, 1561) and a second information identification section (1560) for displaying specific information provided in the storage means (502) and a third information identification section (522, 1562) for displaying specific information ), wherein the control board (502) has a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) different from the first region (1900a), and the second region (1900b) is provided with a fourth information identification section (1902) for displaying specific information, and the first information identification section (523, 1561) and the third information identification section (522, 1562) are at least the same is displayed including identification indications (529, 1595, 1596), the first information identification portion is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized, and the second information identification portion is a light transmission a plurality of colored regions (1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first colored region (1575) among the plurality of colored regions and the first colored region. A viewing portion (1574), which is a portion not marked with a predetermined character between a second colored region (1575) different from the region and used for viewing the plurality of electronic components stored in the storage portion. and

In this case, since at least the same identification mark is attached to the first information identification portion of the storage section and the third information identification portion of the storage means, the examiner can distinguish between the storage means and the storage section on which the same identification display is displayed. and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has taken place. In addition, since the first information identifying portion is attached at an angle such that the mounting location of the storage means can be visually recognized, for example, even if the storage means is replaced due to fraudulent activity, the storage means and the storage portion are attached to the storage means. By judging whether the identification marks are the same, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Furthermore, since the second information identifying portion of the storage portion is provided with a peep portion, the inspector can visually recognize the plurality of electronic components contained in the storage portion through the peep portion. It is possible to confirm whether or not an electronic component has been tampered with. Therefore, an inspector can easily check whether or not a plurality of electronic components contained in the storage section has been tampered with compared to a game machine that does not have a viewing section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. In such a second information identification section, since predetermined characters can be written in a plurality of colored areas, the predetermined characters can be written in the transparent portion without the colored areas that reduce the light transmittance. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information in text form, compared to written information. Furthermore, in such a second information identification section, since the transparent viewing section is provided between the plurality of colored regions, compared to a device in which only a plurality of colored regions are arranged side by side, Since the colored area is conspicuous, the inspector can easily check the characters written in the colored area. In this way, it is easy for the inspector to discover fraudulent behavior, and the occurrence of fraudulent behavior can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 16]
A game machine of invention 16 (game machine 1) comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board and a control means (assembly 2) having a case 1700), and a sealing portion (sealing portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, the sealing portion comprising: A plurality of colored regions (printed portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) which are regions with reduced light transmittance, a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, and a second colored region different from the first colored region and a visible area (peek portion 1574), which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the colored area and where the control board stored in the storage portion can be visually recognized, and the control The means is that some electronic components (electronic components 798) of the plurality of electronic components on the control board are mounted so as to be visible through the visible region, and the some electronic components are The gist is that at least one electronic component (information indicator 1750) among the different electronic components is mounted so as to be visible without going through the visible region.

According to the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in Invention 16, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition after opening the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1, it is required to exhibit the above-described effects.

◆ [Invention 17]
A game machine of invention 17 (game machine 1) comprises a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board a control means (assembly 2) having a case 1700); a seal portion (seal portion 1710) attached to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material; and a predetermined information display portion (information display device 1750) that displays predetermined value information related to the seal portion, and the seal portion includes a plurality of colored regions (print portion 1711, a plurality of areas 1575) and a first colored area among the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area that is different from the first colored area, the portion where a predetermined character is not attached, and a visible area (peeping portion 1574) in which the control board housed in the storage part can be visually recognized, and the control means selects a part of the plurality of electronic components in the control board. (Electronic component 798) is mounted so as to be visible through the visible area, and the predetermined information display part is mounted so as to be visible without going through the visible area. .

According to the game machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in Invention 17, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, making it easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be visually recognized without going through the viewing portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be visually recognized through the viewing portion 1574. Possible tampering with some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, the information display device 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition when the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1 is opened, so it is required to exhibit the above effects.

◆ [Invention 18]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 18 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a light-transmitting case portion (1803) that encloses the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a control means having
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
a sealing portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a light-transmissive material;
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are
distances from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The seal portion is
A portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. The gist is to have a peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be peeped.

In this case, the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined positions of the control means, and the distances from the mounting surface of the substrate to the display of the first and second displays are different, so that the control means cannot be counterfeited. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a fraudulent act of replacing the entire control means with a fraudulent base. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The control means includes a substrate, a case portion, storage means, and electronic components. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case.

◆ [Invention 19]
A game machine (1) of invention 19 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a light-transmitting case portion (1803) that encloses the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a control means having
a sealing portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a light-transmissive material;
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the seal portion is reduced,
The first and second indications (1371, 1372) related to the identification indication (1562) provided on the storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the side of the board on which the storage means is mounted. The distances from the surface to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The seal portion is
A portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being included in the case portion. The gist is to have a peep portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be peeped.

◆ [Invention 20]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 20 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a light-transmissive storage section (1803) that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a control means having
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information,
The first display and the second display are
distances from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. a viewing section (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component;
The gist is to have

◆ [Invention 21]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 21 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having optical transparency, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a control means having
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The first and second indications (1371, 1372) associated with the third information identifying section are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first indication is displayed from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. , 2 The distance until the display is displayed is different,
The second information identification unit is
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. a viewing section (1574) capable of viewing the electronic component;
The gist is to have

◆ [Invention 22]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 22 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in games;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage unit (1803) having optical transparency, which stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
displayed with at least an identifying mark meaning the same,
The second information identification unit is
The mounting location of the storage means is displayed so as to have a visible angle,
The second information identification unit is
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the portion being accommodated in the accommodating portion. and a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

In this case, since the mounting location of the storage means can be visually confirmed, it is possible to deter unauthorized access to the control board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 23]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 23 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
a plurality of first colored regions (1575) that are printed on the first seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the first seal portion is reduced;
A prize ball board (1811) capable of two-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1813) having light transparency that encloses the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board for storing data used for prize balls;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
a second seal portion (1816) provided in the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the second seal portion is reduced,
The first seal portion is
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component included in the first case portion is viewed. has a first peep (1574) capable of
The second seal portion is
Looking into the electronic component included in the second case portion, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region It has a second peep part (1819) that can
The first seal portion and the second seal portion are
The gist of the invention is that the electronic component is transparent to be seen through, and that the respective optical transparency is different.

In this case, since the light transmittance of the first seal portion related to the control board and the second seal portion related to the prize ball board is different, it is difficult to forge the first and second seal parts, and the case part is an illegal board. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing with Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 24]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 24 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and through-hole mounted on the substrate;
a performance board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1823) having light transmissivity that encloses the effect board;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the performance board and storing data used for performance;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the board,
The sealing part (1560) made of a material having optical transparency is
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance;
a portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, wherein the electronic component is included; a peeping section (1574) capable of peeping;
and attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

In this case, since the handling of the seal portion differs between the first case portion of the control board and the second case portion of the effect board, it becomes difficult to forge the first and second case portions and the seal portion, and the case portion is illegally used. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing the board difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

◆ [Invention 25]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 25 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a control means having
A prize ball board (1811) capable of two-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1813) having light transparency that encloses the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board for storing data used for prize balls;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
a prize means having
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
a first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
a plurality of first colored regions (1575) that are printed on the first seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the first seal portion is reduced;
a second seal portion (1816) provided in the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the second seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are
distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The first seal portion is
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component included in the first case portion is viewed. has a first peep (1574) capable of
The second seal portion is
Looking into the electronic component included in the second case portion, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region It has a second peep part (1819) that can
The first seal portion and the second seal portion are
The gist of the invention is that the electronic component is transparent to be seen through, and that the respective optical transparency is different.

◆ [Invention 26]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 26 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a control means having
A prize ball board (1811) capable of two-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1813) having light transparency that encloses the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board for storing data used for prize balls;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
a prize means having
a first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a light-transmissive material;
a plurality of first colored regions (1575) that are printed on the first seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the first seal portion is reduced;
a second seal portion (1816) provided in the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions in which the light transmittance of the second seal portion is reduced,
The first and second indications (1371, 1372) associated with the identification indication (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the storage means of the board is mounted. The distances from the surface on the side to which the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The first seal portion is
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and the electronic component included in the first case portion is viewed. has a first peep (1574) capable of
The second seal portion is
Looking into the electronic component included in the second case portion, which is a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region It has a second peep part (1819) that can
The first seal portion and the second seal portion are
The gist of the invention is that the electronic component is transparent to be seen through, and that the respective optical transparency is different.

◆ [Invention 27]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 27 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the substrate for storing data used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and through-hole mounted on the substrate;
a control means having
a performance board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1823) having light transmissivity that encloses the effect board;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the performance board and storing data used for performance;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the effect board;
a directing means having
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means,
The first display and the second display are
distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The sealing part (1560) made of a material having optical transparency is
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance;
a portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, wherein the electronic component is included; a peeping section (1574) capable of peeping;
and attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

◆ [Invention 28]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 28 comprises a board (501) for controlling a game,
a first case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board for storing memory used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and through-hole mounted on the substrate;
a control means having
a performance board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
A second case part (1823) having light transmissivity that encloses the effect board;
A second storage means (1822) that is provided on the performance board and stores memory used for performance;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board and different from the second storage means and surface-mounted on the board;
and a directing means having
The first and second indications (1371, 1372) associated with the identification indication (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first storage means of the substrate is The distances from the mounting side to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The sealing part (1560) made of a material having optical transparency is
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance;
a portion not marked with a predetermined character between a first colored region and a second colored region different from the first colored region among the plurality of colored regions, wherein the electronic component is included; a peeping section (1574) capable of peeping;
and attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present invention and do not limit the present invention. The present invention may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100... Game machine (game machine), 125... Indicator (display means), 300... Main control board (control means), 320... Production control board (control means), 347... Board lighting device (accessory), 348 1530 Logic part (control means) 4450 Lamp CPU (control means).

Claims (1)

a first control means having a first control board on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted; and a first storage section that houses the first control board and has optical transparency;
a first seal portion adhered to the first storage portion and formed of a material having a first light transmittance;
a second seal portion attached to the first storage portion and formed of a material having a second light transmittance;
an information display portion displayed at a position different from the first seal portion and the second seal portion in the first storage portion for displaying information about the first control means;
a second control means having a second control board capable of communicating with the first control board and having a plurality of electronic components mounted thereon; and a second housing portion containing the second control board and having optical transparency;
a third seal portion attached to the second storage portion and formed of a material having light transmittance different from the first light transmittance;
The first seal portion is
Light transmittance different from the second light transmittance by having a first region in which unique information is formed by a pattern and a second region in which unique information is formed in a manner different from that of the first region. is formed by the first optical transparency of
A plurality of colored regions that are regions having a lower light transmittance than the first light transmittance, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region that is different from the first colored region. In the first region where a predetermined character is not attached between and, the electronic components of the first control board stored in the first storage part are visible due to the first optical transparency . a viewable area;
The information display unit
It is composed of a first display and a second display, wherein the first display and the second display are provided at different positions from the first control board in the thickness direction of the first storage part ,
The third seal portion is
Between a third colored region among a plurality of colored regions that are regions in which light transmittance is reduced in the third sealing portion and a fourth colored region that is different from the third colored region, the second storage portion A game machine having a second visible region in which the electronic components of the second control board housed in the second control board can be visually recognized .

Images